WO2017202333A1 - Method and device for transmitting reference signal, network apparatus and user equipment unit - Google Patents

Method and device for transmitting reference signal, network apparatus and user equipment unit Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017202333A1
WO2017202333A1 PCT/CN2017/085682 CN2017085682W WO2017202333A1 WO 2017202333 A1 WO2017202333 A1 WO 2017202333A1 CN 2017085682 W CN2017085682 W CN 2017085682W WO 2017202333 A1 WO2017202333 A1 WO 2017202333A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
configuration information
subframe
data
reference signal
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2017/085682
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王婷
李元杰
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN201710008515.XA external-priority patent/CN107425948B/en
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP17802179.6A priority Critical patent/EP3457612B1/en
Publication of WO2017202333A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017202333A1/en
Priority to US16/198,244 priority patent/US20190098615A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of wireless communications technologies, and in particular, to a method and a device for transmitting a reference signal, a network device, and a user equipment.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) technology distinguishes transmit and receive channels according to frequency
  • LTE Time Division Duplex (TDD) technology distinguishes transmit and receive channels according to time slots.
  • the downlink signal of the first base station may interfere with the uplink signal of the second base station.
  • the error rate of the uplink data sent by the user equipment under the second base station is high.
  • the embodiment of the invention provides a method and a device for transmitting a reference signal, a network device and a user equipment, which are used to solve the problem of high error rate of uplink data due to interference in the prior art.
  • a first aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for transmitting a reference signal, including:
  • the first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs sends the first reference signal RS to the second network device NE2 to which the second cell CELL2 belongs according to the first configuration information; the first configuration information is used to indicate that the NE1 sending station is included.
  • the information of the time-frequency resource used when the first RS is transmitted is described.
  • CELL1 and CELL2 are respectively used to provide network access services to user equipments under NE1 and NE2.
  • CELL1 and CELL2 may be adjacent or identically covered cells, and NE1 may send the first RS to each antenna port of NE2 through each antenna port of CELL1.
  • the first RS is used by the NE2 to cancel the interference of the NE1 on the first uplink data according to the first RS, where the first uplink data is from a user equipment under the NE2.
  • the NE1 sends the first RS to the antenna port of the CELL2 of the NE2 through the antenna port of the CELL1, and before the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2 according to the first configuration information, the method includes:
  • the NE1 detects that the ratio of the uplink and downlink subframes of the CELL1 and the CELL2 is inconsistent.
  • the transmitting method further includes:
  • the NE1 sends a scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data to the NE2; the first downlink data is a user equipment that is sent by the NE1 to the first cell CELL1 of the NE1. of.
  • the first downlink data may be downlink data sent by the NE1 to the served UE in a subframe that interferes with the first uplink data of the NE2, or sent by the NE1 in a subframe that interferes with the first uplink data of the NE2. Either Downstream data.
  • the scheduling result of the first downlink data may include, but is not limited to, at least one of a transmission mode, a resource location, a modulation mode, a precoding matrix, and the like.
  • the NE1 needs to inform the NE2 of the downlink data of the UE scheduled by the NE1 and the scheduling information, that is, the scheduling result of the first downlink data and the first downlink data, in order to facilitate the NE2 to restore the interference information.
  • the NE1 may also send only the first downlink data, but does not send the scheduling result of the first downlink data.
  • the first downlink data may be transmitted using a predefined MCS or transmission mode.
  • a transmission mode with a simple transmission mode for example, if CELL1 is a single antenna or a transmission method using transmission diversity, and the first downlink data sent by NE1 is the first downlink data processed by the precoding matrix, NE1 is also The scheduling result of the first downlink data may not be transmitted.
  • the NE1 may not send the first downlink data, but only the scheduling result of the first downlink data.
  • the UE under NE1 may be linked to multiple cells, that is, the UE is linked to the CELL1 of the NE1 in addition to the CELL1 of the NE1, and the downlink data of the UE is pre-stored on the NE2 to which the CELL1 belongs and the NE2 to which the CELL2 belongs.
  • the scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data sent by the NE1 to the NE2 may be sent by using a wired or wireless manner, and may be sent by using a resource different from the data sent by the user equipment when transmitting by using a wireless manner.
  • the NE1 sends the scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data to the NE2 by using an X2 interface between the NE1 and the NE2.
  • the first configuration information may include :
  • Subframe information of the first RS and/or,
  • the first resource unit RE indicates information, and the first RE indication information is used to indicate an RE occupied by the first RS.
  • the first cell of the NE1 includes at least An antenna port, where the first RE indication information includes:
  • pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port of the CELL1, where the pilot pattern is used to indicate that each antenna port of the first cell sends the RE of the first RS.
  • each antenna port of the NE1 corresponds to At least one of the pilot patterns belongs to a set of pilot patterns selectable by the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
  • the subframe information of the first RS The determined subframe belongs to a set of optional subframes of the sounding reference signal SRS of NE2. To reduce the impact on the uplink data of the user equipment under NE2.
  • the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is different from the RE used by the SRS under the NE2; and/or; the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information and the SRS used by the NE2
  • the subcarriers in which the REs are located are different; and/or; the REs occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information are different from the symbols of the REs used by the SRSs under the NE2.
  • the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is the last symbol of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS.
  • the subframe information of the first RS For a dedicated subframe, the dedicated subframe carries the first RS.
  • the data frame information may not be transmitted on the dedicated subframe, but only the control information and the reference signal are transmitted.
  • the optional implementation manner of any one of the first to sixth aspects of the first aspect in a seventh optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the subframe information of the first RS Determining only the first RS in the determined subframe, or
  • the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS includes the first RS and physical downlink control channel PDCCH information, or includes the first RS and CRS information, or includes the first RS and PDCCH information, and CRS information.
  • the subframe information of the first RS includes the first RS and the PDCCH information, and the PDCCH information is located in the first to fourth symbols.
  • the first configuration information further includes And the scrambling code is used by the NE1 to scramble the first RS.
  • the scrambling code may be an identifier of the first cell, where the scrambling code may be used to indicate that the first RS corresponds to the first cell.
  • the scrambling code may also be an identifier of the NE1. In this case, the scrambling code may be used to indicate that the first RS corresponds to the NE1.
  • the NE1 is configured according to the first configuration information Before sending the first RS to NE2, it includes:
  • the NE1 sends the second configuration information to the NE2, where the second configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information, and/or second RE indication information;
  • the second RE indication information includes: the first RE indication information in the first configuration information, or
  • the type of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port used by an RS indicates at least one of the three items.
  • the type of the pilot pattern refers to a parameter that is included in the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern that determines a pilot pattern.
  • the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern may include: a type of the reference signal, and an antenna port number. One or more of an antenna port number and a pilot pattern index.
  • the pilot pattern index is used to indicate one of the one or more pilot patterns.
  • the type of the reference signal may include an inter-cell reference signal, a CSI-RS, a DMRS, an SRS, and the like.
  • the second configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS and/or second RE indication information.
  • the second configuration information can be used to determine the first configuration information.
  • the NE2 may pre-store part of the first configuration information or not the first configuration information, and the second configuration information sent by the NE1 to the NE2 may include only the first configuration information that is missing, for example, the NE2 is pre-stored.
  • the second configuration information of the symbol in which the RE of the first RS is located may be sent to the NE2, and the NE2 may send the second configuration information of the symbol in which the RE occupied by the first RS is located, and the NE2 may be configured according to the second configuration information.
  • the pre-stored part of the first configuration information is determined to receive the time-frequency resource of the first RS; if the NE2 does not store the first configuration information, the NE1 may send the second configuration information including all the first configuration information to the NE2, that is, the first
  • the second configuration information includes the subframe information of the first RS and the second RE indication information, where the second RE indication information includes the RE occupied by the first RS.
  • the NE2 may pre-store the type indication identifier of the set of pilot patterns and the corresponding pilot pattern, and the third configuration information sent by the NE1 may include the subframe corresponding to the first RS and the corresponding antenna port.
  • the type of the pilot pattern indicates the identifier, and the NE2 may determine, according to the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port, that each antenna port receives the time-frequency resource of the first RS.
  • the method further includes:
  • the NE1 determines, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the downlink data is sent to the first user equipment UE1 served by the first cell.
  • the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 sends the downlink data may not include the RE that is occupied by the first RS and the RE that is occupied by the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) of the UE1.
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • the NE1 can be instructed to avoid the time-frequency resources occupied by the first RS when receiving the data, and ensure the correctness of the data received by the UE1.
  • the NE1 sends the The third configuration information is used to indicate the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 receives the downlink data from the NE1, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 receives the downlink data from the NE1
  • the first time information of the first RS used by the first configuration information is not overlapped, and the third configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS of the first configuration information, and/or a third RE indication information;
  • the third RE indication information includes: the first RE indication information, or,
  • the type of the corresponding pilot pattern indicates at least one of the three items.
  • the third configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS and/or third RE indication information.
  • the UE1 may pre-store part of the time-frequency resources of the first RS, such as part of the first configuration information, and the third configuration information sent by the NE1 may only include the first configuration information that is missing, for example, the UE1 pre-stores The subframe of the first RS and the subcarrier where the RE occupied by the first RS is located, the NE1 may send only the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS to the UE1, and the UE1 may be pre-stored according to the received third configuration information. Part of the first configuration information determines available time-frequency resources for receiving downlink data.
  • the UE1 may pre-store the pilot patterns corresponding to the identifiers of the various types of the pilot patterns, and the third configuration information sent by the NE1 may include the subframes of the first RS and the corresponding antenna ports.
  • the type of the frequency pattern indicates the identifier, and the UE1 may determine the time-frequency resource of the first RS according to the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port.
  • the third configuration information may only indicate the time-frequency resource of the first RS related to the UE1, for example, the NE1 can learn the sub-carrier used by the UE1, and the third configuration information sent by the NE1 may include the first RS
  • the UE may determine the RE occupied by the first RS, and the NE1 may send the third configuration information to the UE1 by using a broadcast message or UE-specific information, where the UE-specific information includes the UE.
  • the UE-specific information is used for sending to the selected UE, and the broadcast message does not include the identifier of the UE, and the broadcast message itself may have the subframe number, and the third configuration information may not include the subframe information of the first RS. That is, the third configuration information may include the third RE indication information; and the UE-specific information may include the sub-carriers allocated by the selected UE, and the third configuration information may not include the sub-carrier where the RE occupied by the first RS is located.
  • the NE1 sends the third configuration information by using a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information.
  • the NE1 sends the third configuration information by using high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling.
  • the high layer signaling includes a radio resource control RRC message.
  • the RRC message includes a primary system information block MIB message, or a system information block SIB message.
  • the physical layer signaling includes data control indication information DCI.
  • the third configuration information includes the third RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE overlaps with the RE of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH of the UE1;
  • the NE1 sends the third configuration information to the UE1 by using UE-specific information, where the third configuration information includes third RE indication information, the first RS indicated by the third RE indication information, and the The RE of the PDSCH of the UE1 is the intersection of the RE of the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information and the PDSCH of the UE1.
  • the third configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS and the third RE indication information, where the NE1 sends the foregoing in the third configuration information to the UE1 by using a broadcast message.
  • the method further includes:
  • the NE1 receives the second RS sent by the NE2 according to the fifth configuration information, where the fifth configuration information includes the time-frequency resource that the NE2 sends the second RS.
  • the first configuration information includes The subframe information of the first RS
  • the fifth configuration information includes subframe information of the second RS
  • the NE1 sends the first RS on a subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS,
  • the NE1 receives the second RS on a subframe determined by subframe information of the second RS.
  • the subframe information of the first RS and The intersection of the subframes determined by the subframe information of the second RS is not empty, and the front and the back segments of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS respectively include an uplink slot and a downlink slot, or
  • the preceding and following segments of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS include a downlink slot and an uplink slot, respectively;
  • the NE1 sends the first RS on a downlink time slot of the subframe indicated by the subframe information of the first RS, where the NE1 is in the uplink of the subframe indicated by the subframe information of the first RS.
  • the second RS is received on the slot.
  • the first configuration information includes the Sub-frame information of an RS
  • the fifth configuration information includes subframe information of the second RS
  • the subframe information of the first RS includes a period and a partial of a subframe of the first RS
  • the subframe information of the second RS includes a period and an offset of a subframe of the second RS, and a period of the subframe of the first RS is the same as a period of a subframe of the second RS, where the first RS is The offset of the subframe is separated from the offset of the subframe of the second RS by one cycle;
  • the NE1 periodically sends the first RS to the NE2, and the NE1 periodically receives the second RS sent by the NE2.
  • the definition of the period and offset of the subframe of the first RS may be similar to the definition of the period and offset of the subframe of the SRS.
  • the offset can be a subframe number.
  • the NE1 is received by each antenna port of the CELL1
  • the second RS sent by each antenna port of the CELL2 of the NE2 and the subframe information of the second RS is determined by the NE2 according to the cell identifier of the CELL2.
  • the cell identifier of the CELL2 is an even number
  • the cell identifier of the CELL1 is an odd number
  • the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS is a first subframe
  • the subframe determined by the subframe information of the second RS is a second subframe
  • the second The subframe is a subframe of a period of one subframe of the first RS after the first subframe;
  • the cell identifier of the CELL2 is an odd number
  • the cell identifier of the CELL1 is an even number.
  • the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS is a first subframe
  • the subframe determined by the subframe information of the second RS is a subframe.
  • the second subframe is a subframe of a period of one subframe of the first RS after the first subframe.
  • the first subframe may be preset. For example, when the cell identifier is an odd number, the first subframe is preset as the subframe of the first RS.
  • the optional embodiment of any one of the first to the eighteenth aspects of the first aspect in the nineteenth alternative embodiment of the first aspect, wherein the NE1 passes through each of the CELL1
  • the antenna port sends the first RS to each antenna port of the CELL2 of the NE2
  • the subframe information of the first RS is determined by the NE1 according to the cell identifier of the CELL1.
  • the CELL1 and the CELL2 Belongs to a community collaboration set.
  • the NE1 passes the CELL1
  • the antenna port sends the first RS to the antenna port of the CELL2 of the NE2, and before the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2 according to the first configuration information, the method includes:
  • the NE1 detects that the ratio of the uplink and downlink subframes of the CELL1 and the CELL2 is inconsistent.
  • a second aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for transmitting a reference signal, including:
  • the second network device NE2 to which the second cell CELL2 belongs receives the first reference signal RS sent by the first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs according to the first configuration information, where the first configuration information includes Information of a time-frequency resource used by the first RS.
  • the NE2 cancels the interference of the NE1 on the first uplink data according to the first RS, where the first uplink data is from a user equipment under the NE2.
  • the NE2 cancels the NE1 pair according to the first RS
  • the interference of the first uplink data includes:
  • the NE2 obtains a first channel between the NE1 and the NE2 according to the first RS;
  • the NE2 obtains a first interference signal according to the first channel
  • the NE2 demodulates the first uplink data according to the first interference signal.
  • the NE2 is configured according to the first channel Before the first interference signal is obtained, it includes:
  • the NE2 receives the scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data that is sent by the NE1, where the first downlink data is sent by the NE1 to the user equipment under the NE1;
  • the NE2 obtains the first interference signal according to the first channel, and includes:
  • the NE2 restores the first interference signal according to at least one of the first downlink data and the scheduling result of the first downlink data and the first channel.
  • the NE2 passes the NE2 and the The X2 interface between the NEs receives the scheduling result of the first downlink data and the first downlink data.
  • the first configuration information includes:
  • the subframe information of the first RS and,
  • the first resource unit RE indicates information, and the first RE indication information is used to indicate an RE occupied by the first RS.
  • the meaning of the first configuration information of the second aspect is the same as that of the first configuration information of the first aspect, and details are not described herein again.
  • the NE2 receives the second configuration information sent by the NE1; the second configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS, and/or second RE indication information;
  • the second RE indication information includes: an RE location of the first RS, or a symbol in which the RE occupied by the first RS is located and a subcarrier where the RE occupied by the first RS is located, and the CELL1 Sending, by the type of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port used by the first RS, at least one of the three items;
  • the NE2 determines the first configuration information according to the second configuration information.
  • the meaning of the second configuration information of the second aspect is the same as that of the second configuration information of the first aspect, and details are not described herein again.
  • the method further includes:
  • the NE2 determines, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the second user equipment UE2 served by the CELL2 sends uplink data.
  • the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE2 sends the uplink data may not include the RE that is occupied by the first RS and the RE that is occupied by the PUSCH of the physical uplink shared channel of the UE2.
  • the NE2 can instruct the UE2 to avoid the time-frequency resources occupied by the first RS when transmitting data, and ensure the correctness of the data transmitted by the UE2.
  • the transmitting method further includes:
  • the NE2 sends the fourth configuration information to the UE2, where the fourth configuration information is used to indicate the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE2 sends the uplink data to the NE2, and is available when the UE2 sends the uplink data to the NE2.
  • the time-frequency resource does not overlap with the time-frequency resource used by the NE1 that is sent by the first configuration information to send the first RS.
  • the fourth configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information, and/or fourth RE indication information;
  • the fourth RE indication information includes: an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information, or an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information. And a symbol, or a subcarrier in which the RE of the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is located, or at least one of a type indication identifier of a pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port of the CELL1.
  • the fourth configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS and/or fourth RE indication information.
  • the UE2 may pre-store a part of the time-frequency resources of the first RS, such as a part of the first configuration information, and the fourth configuration information sent by the NE2 may only include the first configuration information that is missing, for example, the UE2 pre-stores
  • the subframe of the first RS and the subcarrier where the RE occupied by the first RS is located, NE2 may send only the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS to the UE2, and the UE2 may be pre-stored according to the received fourth configuration information.
  • Part of the first configuration information determines available time-frequency resources for receiving downlink data.
  • the UE2 may pre-store the pilot patterns corresponding to the identifiers of the various types of the pilot patterns, and the fourth configuration information sent by the NE2 may include the subframes of the first RS and the corresponding antenna ports.
  • the type of the frequency pattern indicates the identifier, and the UE2 may determine the time-frequency resource of the first RS according to the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port.
  • the fourth configuration information may only indicate the time-frequency resource of the first RS related to the UE2, for example, the NE2 can learn the sub-carrier used by the UE2, and the fourth configuration information sent by the NE2 may include the first The subframe of the RS and the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS, the UE2 may determine the RE occupied by the first RS; for example, the NE2 may send the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using a broadcast message or UE-specific information, where the UE-specific information includes The identifier of the UE, the UE-specific information is used for sending to the selected UE, and the broadcast message does not include the identifier of the UE.
  • the broadcast message itself may have a subframe number, and the fourth configuration information may not include the subframe information of the first RS.
  • the fourth configuration information may include the third RE indication information, and the UE-specific information may include the sub-carrier allocated by the selected UE, and the fourth configuration information may not include the sub-carrier where the RE occupied by the first RS is located. .
  • the NE2 sends the third configuration information by using a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information.
  • the NE2 sends the third configuration information by using high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling.
  • the high layer signaling includes a radio resource control RRC message.
  • the RRC message includes a primary system information block MIB message, or a system information block SIB message.
  • the physical layer signaling includes data control indication information DCI.
  • the first configuration information includes the first RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information overlaps with the RE of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH of the UE2;
  • the NE2 sends the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using the UE-specific information, where the fourth configuration information includes a fourth RE indication information, where the fourth RE indication information is occupied by the first RS
  • the RE location of the PUSCH in which the RE conflicts is the intersection of the RE location indicated by the first RE indication information and the PUSCH of the UE2.
  • the fourth configuration information includes a subframe of the first RS and the fourth RE indication information, where
  • the NE2 sends the subframe information of the first RS in the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using a broadcast message; the NE2 sends the first part of the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using UE-specific information.
  • Four RE indication information where
  • a third aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for transmitting a reference signal, including:
  • the first user equipment UE1 determines a time-frequency resource available when receiving data or transmitting data.
  • the time-frequency resource that is available when the data is received or transmitted may not overlap with the time-frequency resource used by the first RS.
  • the first RS is sent by the first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs to the second network device NE2 to which the second cell CELL2 belongs.
  • the user equipment can determine the available time-frequency resources when the data is transmitted or received by the user according to the third configuration information. Specifically, the user equipment can use the time-frequency resource used by the first RS to transmit data or receive data.
  • the method provided by the present aspect can ensure the correctness of the user equipment to send data or receive data while transmitting the first RS.
  • the third configuration information is used to indicate all or part of the time-frequency resources occupied by the first reference signal RS, where the first RS is the first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs to belong to the second cell CELL2.
  • the serving cell of the UE1 is sent by the second network device NE2, and the serving cell of the UE1 is CELL1 or CELL2.
  • any one of the optional embodiments of the third aspect, in the second optional implementation manner of the third aspect, the determining, by the UE1, the received data or the sending according to the third configuration information Before the time-frequency resources available for data include:
  • the UE1 receives the third configuration information from the NE1 or the NE2.
  • the third configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS, and/or third RE indication information,
  • the third RE indication information includes: an RE location occupied by the first RS, or
  • the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS is at least one of three types of the pilot pattern of the pilot pattern in which the RE of the first RS is located and the type of the pilot pattern corresponding to the RE occupied by the first RS.
  • the meaning of the third configuration information of the third aspect is the same as that of the third configuration information of the first aspect, and details are not described herein again.
  • the UE1 receives a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information, where the broadcast message and/or UE-specific information includes the third configuration information.
  • the UE1 receives high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling, where the high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling includes the third configuration information.
  • the high layer signaling includes a radio resource control RRC message.
  • the RRC message includes a primary system information block MIB message, or a system information block SIB message.
  • the physical layer signaling includes data control indication information DCI.
  • the serving cell of the UE1 is CELL1
  • the third configuration information is sent by the NE1
  • the UE1 determines, according to the third configuration information, time-frequency resources that are available when receiving data or transmitting data, including:
  • the UE1 determines, according to the third configuration information, a time-frequency resource available when receiving data.
  • the third configuration information includes the The third RE indicates the information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE overlaps with the RE of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH of the UE1,
  • the UE1 receives the third configuration information by using the UE-specific information sent by the NE1, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 determines the received data is that the PDSCH of the UE1 is occupied by the first RS. RE not Overlapping REs.
  • the serving cell of the UE1 is CELL2
  • the third configuration information is sent by the NE2
  • the UE1 determines, according to the third configuration information, time-frequency resources that are available when receiving data or transmitting data, including:
  • the UE1 determines, according to the third configuration information, a time-frequency resource available when data is transmitted.
  • the third configuration information is included, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE indication information overlaps with the RE of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH of the UE1;
  • the UE1 receives the third configuration information by using the UE-specific information that is sent by the NE2, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 determines the data to be sent, is the PUSCH of the UE1 and the first RS.
  • the REs that occupy the RE do not overlap.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a transmission device for a reference signal, where the device may be a network device, and the network device has a function of implementing behavior of the first network device in the foregoing method.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a transmission device for a reference signal, where the device may be a network device, and the network device has a function of implementing the behavior of the second network device in the actual method.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a transmission device for a reference signal, where the device may be a user equipment, and the user equipment has a function of realizing the behavior of the user equipment in the actual method.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a network device, where the network device has a function of implementing behavior of a first network device in the foregoing method.
  • the structure of the network device includes a wireless communication interface, such as a transmitter and a receiver, and a network communication interface.
  • the wireless communication interface is configured to support communication between the network device and the network device and the user equipment, and the transmitter is configured to send information or data involved in the foregoing method to the network device and the user equipment, where the receiver is used to support the network.
  • the device receives information or data sent by the network device and the user equipment involved in the foregoing method, and the network communication interface is used to support communication between the network device and the network device.
  • a demodulator and/or a decoder may also be included in the structure of the network device.
  • the demodulator is configured to demodulate or despread and demodulate information or data involved in the above method; the decoder is configured to decode or descramble information or data involved in the above method And decoding.
  • a processor may also be included in the structure of the network device.
  • the processor is configured to support a network device to perform a corresponding function of the above methods. It can be understood that when the demodulator and/or decoder are not included in the structure of the network device, the functions of the demodulator and/or decoder may also be at the receiver or the Completed in the processor.
  • the network device can also include a memory for coupling with the processor to store program instructions and data necessary for the network device.
  • the network device may further include an interface unit for supporting communication with other network devices, such as a core network segment. Communication between points.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a network device, where the network device has a function of implementing behavior of a second network device in the foregoing method.
  • the structure of the network device includes a wireless communication interface, such as a transmitter and a receiver, and a network communication interface.
  • the wireless communication interface is configured to support communication between the network device and the network device and the user equipment, and the transmitter is configured to send information or data involved in the foregoing method to the network device and the user equipment, where the receiver is used to support the network.
  • the device receives information or data sent by the network device and the user equipment involved in the foregoing method, and the network communication interface is used to support communication between the network device and the network device.
  • a demodulator and/or a decoder may also be included in the structure of the network device.
  • the demodulator is configured to demodulate or despread and demodulate information or data involved in the above method; the decoder is configured to decode or descramble information or data involved in the above method And decoding.
  • a processor may also be included in the structure of the network device.
  • the processor is configured to support a network device to perform a corresponding function of the above methods. It can be understood that when the demodulator and/or decoder are not included in the structure of the network device, the functions of the demodulator and/or decoder may also be at the receiver or the Completed in the processor.
  • the network device can also include a memory for coupling with the processor to store program instructions and data necessary for the network device.
  • the network device may also include an interface unit for supporting communication with other network devices, such as communication with a core network node.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a user equipment, where the structure of the user equipment includes a transceiver, such as a receiver and a transmitter.
  • the transmitter is configured to support the user equipment to send information or data involved in the foregoing method to the network device
  • the receiver is configured to support the user equipment to receive information or data sent by the network device involved in the foregoing method.
  • an encoder and/or a modulator may also be included in the structure of the user equipment.
  • the encoder is used to encode or encode and scramble the information or data involved in the above method; the modulator is used to modulate or modulate and spread the information or data involved in the above method.
  • the user equipment may further include a processor.
  • the processor is configured to support a user device to perform a corresponding function in the above method. It can be understood that when the modulator and/or the encoder are not included in the structure of the user equipment, the functions of the modulator and/or the encoder may also be in the transmitter or the processor. carry out.
  • the user equipment may also include a memory for coupling with the processor to store program instructions and data necessary for the user equipment.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication system, where the system includes the network device and the user equipment in the foregoing aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a computer storage medium for storing computer software instructions for use in the network device, including a program designed to perform the above aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a computer storage medium for storing computer software instructions for use by the user equipment, including a program designed to perform the above aspects.
  • the method for transmitting the reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present invention sends the first reference information to the second network device to which the second cell belongs, by using the first network device to which the first cell belongs, so that the second network device can be based on the first reference signal.
  • the interference of the first network device on the uplink data of the user equipment under the second network device is eliminated.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart diagram of Embodiment 1 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of an interaction process of an optional implementation manner in which the S102NE2 cancels the interference of the first uplink data by the first RS according to the first RS in the method shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of an optional implementation manner of acquiring first configuration information by NE2 in the method shown in FIG. 1;
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a first optional implementation manner of Embodiment 2 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a second optional implementation manner of Embodiment 2 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a first optional implementation manner of Embodiment 3 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a second optional implementation manner of Embodiment 3 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a first alternative embodiment of first RE indication information of first configuration information
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a second optional implementation manner of first RE indication information of the first configuration information
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a third alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a fourth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information
  • FIG. 12 is a first partial schematic diagram of a fifth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a second part of a fifth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a sixth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information
  • 15 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of an optional implementation manner of the first configuration information
  • 16 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of still another optional implementation manner of the first configuration information
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of still another network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of an optional network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of another network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of an optional user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the interference problem is also becoming more and more significant.
  • the downlink frequency band of one cell may overlap with the uplink frequency band of another cell, and the uplink signal of the first cell is uplinked to the uplink signal of the second cell.
  • Interference For example, for a cell in the TDD mode, although the uplink and downlink data channels can be separated by different time slots by using a subframe ratio, when the uplink and downlink subframe ratios of the cells of the neighboring cell are different from the local cell, the cell The signal transmitted on the downlink time slot still interferes with the signal transmitted on the uplink time slot of the neighboring cell.
  • a dynamic TDD technology that is more advanced than the conventional TDD technology can flexibly and quickly switch the time slot configuration of the cell according to the uplink and downlink traffic load conditions of the network, and improve the throughput of the uplink and downlink services of the cell by matching the specific service requirements of the cell. the amount.
  • the introduction of dynamic TDD technology also inevitably introduces uplink and downlink interference between different cells. This makes the inter-cell interference problem between cells more serious. Only by effectively solving this problem can the dynamic and efficient performance advantages of dynamic TDD technology be fully utilized.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a method for transmitting a reference signal, which is used to eliminate interference, thereby improving the correctness of the received data.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart diagram of Embodiment 1 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the executor of the embodiment of the present invention may include: a first network device NE1, and a second network device NE2.
  • the network device includes a wireless interface that communicates with the user equipment, so that the user equipment performs wireless communication through the network device.
  • the network device may be a base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in a GSM system or a CDMA system, or may be a base station (NodeB, NB) in a WCDMA system, or may be an evolved base station (eNB) in an LTE system.
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • NodeB, NB base station
  • eNB evolved base station
  • eNodeB or a wireless controller in a Cloud Radio Access Network (CRAN)
  • the network device can be a relay station, an access point, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, or a network in a future 5G network.
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the method of the embodiment of the present invention may include:
  • the NE1 sends the first reference signal RS to the NE2 according to the first configuration information.
  • NE1 and NE2 may be base station type homogeneous networks or network devices in a heterogeneous network.
  • NE1 and NE2 may both be micro base stations or macro base stations. They are a micro base station and a macro base station, respectively.
  • NE1 and NE2 may be the same base station or different base stations.
  • the first configuration information includes information used to indicate that the NE1 sends the time-frequency resource used by the first RS to the NE2.
  • the time-frequency resource may include at least one of a time domain resource, a frequency domain resource, and a spatial domain resource.
  • the time-frequency resource indicated by the first configuration information may be the subframe information of the first RS, and/or the first RE indication information indicating the RE occupied by the first RS.
  • the first configuration information may further include a scrambling code, where the scrambling code may be used by the NE1 to perform scrambling on the first RS.
  • the scrambling code can be an identifier of NE1.
  • NE1 may send the first RS to an antenna port of the second cell CELL2 of NE2 through an antenna port of the first cell CELL1.
  • CELL1 of NE1 and CELL2 of NE2 may belong to the same collaboration set, and subframes of each network device in one collaboration set are synchronized.
  • the subframes may be aligned periodically such that the start positions of the subframes having the same subframe number in each network device are the same.
  • NE1 can send the first RS to NE2 through the antenna of NE1, and NE2 receives the first RS through the antenna device of NE2. That is, the first RS experiences the first channel between NE1 and NE2. Since the TDD system channel has channel reciprocity, the channel transmitted by NE2 to NE1 can be estimated according to the channel transmitted by N1 to NE2. Therefore, the first channel between NE1 and NE2 can be estimated according to the first RS.
  • NE1 may send the first RS to an antenna port of the second cell CELL2 of the NE2 by using an antenna port of the first cell CELL1, and the interference eliminated by the first RS by the NE2 is a downlink channel pair CELL2 of the CELL1. Interference generated by the upstream channel.
  • S102 The NE2 cancels the interference of the NE1 on the first uplink data according to the first RS.
  • the first uplink data is from the user equipment under the NE2.
  • the user equipment may be various types of terminal equipment, and the terminal equipment may be mobile or fixed.
  • the terminal device may refer to an access terminal, a user equipment (User Equipment, UE), a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a terminal, a wireless communication device, and a user agent. Or user device.
  • the access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), with wireless communication.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of an interaction process of an optional implementation manner in which the S102NE2 cancels the interference of the first uplink data by the first RS according to the first RS in the method shown in FIG.
  • S102 in the transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present invention may include S201-S203.
  • NE2 restores the first channel between NE1 and NE2 according to the first RS.
  • the NE2 obtains the first interference signal according to at least one of the first downlink data and the scheduling result of the first downlink data, and the first channel.
  • the scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data may be sent by NE1 to NE2 before S202, or may be a scheduling result of predefined downlink data and downlink data.
  • the first interference signal includes an interference signal of the downlink data of the NE1 to the first uplink data.
  • S203 The NE2 demodulates the first uplink data according to the first interference signal.
  • the first interference signal may be used to remove the interference signal in the received signal stream of the first uplink data, thereby improving the correctness of the NE2 to demodulate the first uplink data.
  • the method may include:
  • NE1 sends a scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data to NE2.
  • the first downlink data is sent by the NE1 to the user equipment of the NE1, and the NE1 may send the first downlink data and/or the first downlink to the NE2 through a wired data channel such as an X2 interface or a network management interface.
  • the scheduling result of the row data optionally, the NE1 may also send the scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data through the wireless data channel.
  • NE1 and NE2 may be the same network device, and the NE2 may obtain the scheduling result of the first downlink data and the first downlink data by using a data channel between the internal modules. In this case, those skilled in the art. It should be clear that S201 is not a step that must be performed.
  • S201 to S203 are an alternative manner in which NE2 cancels the interference of NE1 on the first uplink data, and other optional manners are described below.
  • the downlink time slot of CELL1 is exactly the uplink time slot of CELL2. Then, when there is downlink data on the downlink time slot of CELL1, it will interfere with the signal on the uplink time slot of CELL2. If the uplink and downlink subframe ratios of the neighboring cells are restricted, the resources in one transmission direction may be wasted and the resources in the other transmission direction may be insufficient for the cells with different loads.
  • the uplink and downlink subframe ratios are The interference generated by the inconsistency is usually not solved by coordinating the uplink and downlink subframe ratio of the neighboring cell.
  • the NE1 sends the first RS to the antenna port of the second cell CELL2 of the NE2 through the antenna port of the first cell CELL1.
  • An RS experiences the channel between CELL1 of NE1 and CELL2 of NE2, then NE2 can eliminate this situation according to the first RS.
  • the downlink data of CELL1 under NE1 interferes with the uplink data of NE2.
  • the method for transmitting a reference signal in the embodiment of the present invention is also applicable to a scenario in which a TDD cell adopts a dynamic cell uplink-downlink subframe ratio.
  • the uplink and downlink subframe ratio of the cell of the TDD cell is based on the load of the cell.
  • the dynamic adjustment is performed automatically.
  • the neighboring TDD cells cannot ensure that the uplink and downlink subframe ratios of the neighboring cells are the same. Therefore, interference between adjacent cells is inevitable, and the present invention is implemented.
  • the method for transmitting the reference signal provided by the example can also eliminate the interference in the uplink and downlink subframe matching scenario of the dynamically configured cell, and does not require manual intervention at all.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a method for starting to transmit a reference signal, where the ratio of the downlink subframes of the cell in the cell or the neighboring cell is changed, and the ratio of the uplink and downlink subframes of the cell to the neighboring cell is matched.
  • the NE1 restarts the method of sending the first RS for the NE2 to cancel the interference from the NE1.
  • the method may further include: NE1 detects that the uplink and downlink subframe ratios of CELL1 and CELL2 are inconsistent.
  • NE1 may detect that the uplink subframe ratio of CELL1 and CELL2 is inconsistent. For example, NE2 may periodically send the uplink and downlink subframe ratio of the cell under NE2 to NE1, or NE1 also You can use the NMS to initiate an inquiry message to NE2 to obtain the uplink and downlink subframe ratio of CELL2.
  • the embodiments of the present invention are not limited. 3 is a schematic flow chart of an alternative embodiment of a method for transmitting a reference signal shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 3 is a flow chart of an optional implementation manner in which the NE2 obtains the first configuration information in the method shown in FIG.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides two ways for NE2 to obtain the first configuration information.
  • the NE2 may pre-store the first configuration information, and receive the first RS according to the time-frequency resource indicated by the first configuration information.
  • the NE2 may pre-store part of the first configuration information, or may not store the first configuration information, and the NE1 needs the NE2 before sending the first RS.
  • the configuration information of the first RS is sent to the NE2 to indicate that the NE2 receives the first RS according to the time-frequency resource occupied by the first RS indicated by the first configuration information.
  • the method may further include:
  • the NE2 determines the first configuration information according to the second configuration information.
  • the NE2 may determine the first configuration information according to the second configuration information, that is, receive the time-frequency resource of the first RS.
  • the second configuration information only needs to include a part of the first configuration information that is not stored by the NE2.
  • the NE1 may send the first RS in a broadcast manner, that is, the first configuration information used by the first network to send the same to the different network devices is the same, only the first RS.
  • the passages are different.
  • the method for transmitting a reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present invention sends a reference signal to the second network device by using the first network device, where the reference signal experiences a channel between the first network device and the second network device, so that the second network device can
  • the interference from the first network device to the uplink data sent by the user equipment under the second network device is eliminated according to the reference signal, thereby improving the transmission accuracy of the uplink data.
  • the user equipment UE may determine the time-frequency resource available when receiving the data or transmitting the data, and the time-frequency resource available when the received data or the data is sent is not the time-frequency resource used by the first RS.
  • the first RS is sent by the first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs to the second network device NE2 to which the second cell CELL2 belongs.
  • the user equipment may include UE1 under CELL1 and UE2 under CELL2.
  • UE1 and UE2 can also be moved to CELL2 and CELL1 respectively.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a first optional implementation manner of Embodiment 2 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a second optional implementation manner of Embodiment 2 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides two guarantees for downlink data transmission of the UE.
  • the executor of the embodiment of the present invention includes a user equipment UE in addition to NE1 and NE2 described above.
  • the serving cell of the first user equipment UE1 may belong to NE1.
  • the serving cell of the UE1 may also be a cell that belongs to the NE2 but is adjacent to the cell under the NE1.
  • the steps of this embodiment may include:
  • the UE1 determines, according to the third configuration information, an available time-frequency resource when receiving data.
  • the UE1 may also determine the available time-frequency resources when receiving data according to the configuration information of the first RS related to the UE1, instead of all the first configuration information, that is, the UE1 receives the downlink (DownLink, DL for short).
  • the time-frequency resource of the data, the third configuration information may be the same as the first configuration information, or may be the time-frequency resource related to the UE1 in the first configuration information.
  • the UE1 may consider only the time-frequency resource used by the first RS and the UE1.
  • the subcarriers or symbols with the same time-frequency resources are used.
  • the manner in which the UE1 acquires the configuration information of the first RS related to the UE1 in the first configuration information is the same as the manner in which the UE1 acquires the third configuration information that is the same as the first configuration information.
  • the manner in which the UE1 obtains the third configuration information may be similar to the manner in which the NE2 obtains the first configuration information.
  • the UE1 may store all the third configuration information in advance, or may store part of the first configuration information or not.
  • the first configuration information is sent by the NE1 to the UE2 for the configuration information of the first RS required by the UE1 before the first RS is sent.
  • the method may further include:
  • the third configuration information is used to indicate the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 receives the downlink data, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 receives the downlink data from the NE1 and the NE1 sending station indicated by the first configuration information.
  • the time-frequency resources used by the first RS do not overlap.
  • NE1 may send the third configuration information by using physical layer signaling. For example, NE1 transmits the third configuration information through the data control indication information DCI.
  • the NE1 may send the third configuration information by using a radio resource control RRC message. If the RRC message is used to send the third configuration information, the UE may not send the subframe of the first RS, and the UE may obtain the corresponding subframe in the RRC message, thereby saving the overhead of message transmission. Further, NE1 may send the third configuration information by using high layer signaling.
  • the high layer signaling may be, for example, a broadcast message or UE specific information.
  • the NE1 may send the third configuration information by using a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information.
  • NE1 may pass the subframe information of the first RS and the RE indication information of the first RS through a broadcast message and a UE-specific letter, respectively.
  • the UE may send the subframe information of the first RS and the RE indication information of the first RS to the UE1 by using a broadcast message, or the NE1 may use the subframe information of the first RS.
  • the RE indication information of the first RS is sent to the UE1 by using UE-specific information.
  • the NE1 may also send the third configuration information to the UE1 by using a primary system information block MIB message or a system information block SIB message.
  • the UE-specific information usually includes the identifier of the specified UE, that is, the UE-specific information is sent to the part of the UE, and the broadcast message is not limited to the UE identifier, that is, it can be sent to all UEs in the cell.
  • the third configuration information may include only the symbol in which the RE occupied by the first RS is located, and the UE1 may determine the available time-frequency resources.
  • the third configuration information includes the third RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE overlaps with the RE of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH of the UE1,
  • the UE1 receives the third configuration information that is sent by the NE1, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 determines the received data is that the RE of the UE1 and the RE occupied by the first RS are not Overlapping REs.
  • UE1 deducts the RE location occupied by the first RS in the PDSCH.
  • S410 is not a mandatory step.
  • the UE1 may receive data according to the time-frequency resource of the received downlink data indicated when the downlink data is scheduled by the NE1, so as to avoid erroneously treating the data on the time-frequency resource occupied by the first RS as downlink data processing. That is to say, in this embodiment, when the first RS is sent by NE1 to NE2, UE1 can still correctly receive downlink data.
  • the method may include:
  • the NE1 determines, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the downlink data is sent to the first user equipment UE1.
  • the UE1 may receive data according to the time-frequency resource of the received downlink data indicated when the downlink data is scheduled by the NE1, without special processing for the first RS in the downlink data, that is, the processing of the UE1 is completely complete with the existing UE. the same. That is to say, in this embodiment, the improvement of the network device can be supported without replacing the UE.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a first optional implementation manner of Embodiment 3 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a second optional implementation manner of Embodiment 3 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides two types of uplink data transmission for the UE. Selected implementation.
  • the executor of the embodiment of the present invention may further include a user equipment UE in addition to NE1 and NE2 described above.
  • the serving cell of the second user equipment UE2 may belong to NE2.
  • the serving cell of the UE2 may also be a cell that belongs to the NE1 but is adjacent to the cell under the NE2.
  • the steps of this embodiment may include:
  • the UE2 determines, according to the fourth configuration information, an available time-frequency resource when the data is sent.
  • the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2 to occupy the time-frequency resource that the NE2 receives the data sent by the UE2, that is, The UE2 sends the time-frequency resources of the Uplink (UL) data. Therefore, the UE2 needs to determine the time-frequency resources available when the data is transmitted according to the time-frequency resources occupied by the first RS, so as to avoid conflicts in the transmitted data.
  • UL Uplink
  • the UE2 may also determine the available time-frequency resources when receiving data according to the configuration information of the first RS related to the UE2, instead of all the first configuration information, that is, the fourth configuration information may be the first
  • the configuration information is the same, and may be the time-frequency resource related to the UE2 in the first configuration information.
  • the UE2 may consider only the time-frequency resource used by the first RS and the time-frequency resource with the same sub-carrier or symbol used by the UE2.
  • the manner in which the UE 2 acquires the configuration information of the first RS related to the UE 2 is the same as the manner in which the UE 2 acquires the fourth configuration information that is the same as the first configuration information.
  • the manner in which the UE 2 obtains the fourth configuration information may be similar to the manner in which the NE2 obtains the first configuration information.
  • the UE 2 may store all the fourth configuration information in advance, or may store part of the first configuration information or not.
  • the NE2 sends the configuration information of the first RS required by the UE2 to the UE2.
  • the method may further include:
  • the fourth configuration information is used to indicate that the UE2 sends the available time-frequency resources of the uplink data to the NE2, and the time-frequency resources available when the UE2 sends the uplink data to the NE2 and the NE1 indicated by the first configuration information.
  • the time-frequency resources used for transmitting the first RS do not overlap.
  • S610 is not a mandatory step.
  • NE2 may send the fourth configuration information by using physical layer signaling.
  • NE2 transmits the fourth configuration information through the data control indication information DCI.
  • NE2 may send fourth configuration information by using a radio resource control RRC message. If the RRC message is used to send the fourth configuration information, the UE may not send the subframe of the first RS, and the UE may obtain the corresponding subframe in the RRC message, thereby saving the overhead of message transmission. Further, the NE2 can send the fourth configuration information by using the high layer signaling.
  • the high layer signaling may be, for example, a broadcast message or UE specific information.
  • the NE2 may send the fourth configuration information by using a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information.
  • NE2 may send the subframe information of the first RS and the RE indication information of the first RS to the UE2 through the broadcast message and the UE-specific information, respectively.
  • the NE2 may use the subframe information of the first RS and the first The RE indication information of the RS is sent to the UE2 by using a broadcast message, or the NE2 may send the subframe information of the first RS and the RE indication information of the first RS to the UE2 through the UE-specific information.
  • the NE2 may also send the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using a primary system information block MIB message or a system information block SIB message.
  • the UE-specific information usually includes the identifier of the specified UE, that is, the UE-specific information is sent to the part of the UE, and the broadcast message is not limited to the UE identifier, that is, it can be sent to all UEs in the cell.
  • the fourth configuration information since the sub-carrier in which the UE is located may be determined, the fourth configuration information may only include the symbol in which the RE occupied by the first RS is located, and the UE2 may determine the available time-frequency resource.
  • the fourth configuration information includes the fourth RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the fourth RE overlaps with the RE of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH of the UE2,
  • the UE2 receives the fourth configuration information that is sent by the NE2; the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE2 determines the data to be sent is that the RE of the UE2 and the RE occupied by the first RS are not Overlapping REs.
  • the UE2 may send data according to the time-frequency resource of the uplink data that is indicated when the uplink data is scheduled by the NE2, and avoid using the time-frequency resource occupied by the first RS to send the uplink data, thereby preventing the NE2 from mistaking the UE2 in the first.
  • the uplink data sent on the time-frequency resource occupied by the RS is treated as the first RS. That is to say, in this embodiment, when the first RS is sent by NE1 to NE2, the UE can still correctly receive downlink data.
  • the method may include:
  • the NE2 determines, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the UE2 sends the uplink data.
  • the UE2 may send data according to the time-frequency resource of the uplink data that is indicated when the uplink data is scheduled by the NE2, so that the UE2 does not need to consider the conflict with the time-frequency resource occupied by the first RS when the uplink data is sent, that is, the UE2
  • the processing is exactly the same as the existing UE. That is to say, in this embodiment, the improvement of the network device can be supported without replacing the UE.
  • the UE1 may also perform the method performed by the UE2 shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 7 above.
  • the UE2 may also perform the method performed by the UE1 shown in FIG. 4 to FIG. 5 above.
  • an embodiment of the present invention further provides an optional implementation manner of six first configuration information.
  • the NE1 may transmit the first RS by using one or more of the optional embodiments of the following first configuration information.
  • the CELL1 of the NE1 may include at least one antenna port, and the first RE indication information of the first configuration information may include:
  • pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port of the NE1, where the pilot pattern is used to indicate that each antenna port of the NE1 sends an RE position of the first RS.
  • the RE position of each antenna port that sends the first RS may correspond to one pilot pattern, or the RE position of each antenna port that sends the first RS may form a pilot pattern.
  • the CELL1 of the NE1 may include one or more antenna ports, and the first RE indication information may be one pilot pattern or multiple pilot patterns, and each antenna port may correspond to one pilot pattern.
  • Each pilot pattern can include at least one RE location.
  • the pilot patterns of more than one of the plurality of antenna ports may be the same.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a first alternative embodiment of first RE indication information of the first configuration information.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a second alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a third alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information.
  • 11 is a first partial schematic diagram of a fourth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information.
  • 12 is a second partial schematic diagram of a fourth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a second part of a fifth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information.
  • 14 is a schematic diagram of a sixth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information.
  • the RE position of the first RS sent on each antenna port may be a group of REs with the same symbol but different subcarriers, as shown in FIG. It is a group of REs with the same subcarriers but different symbols, as shown in Figure 9.
  • R 0 , R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are REs of the CRS
  • NE1 may be eNB1
  • NE2 may be eNB2
  • the RE position of the first RS may avoid the RE position that conflicts with the CRS.
  • the RE location of the first RS may also avoid the RE location that conflicts with the uplink DMRS and/or the downlink DMRS.
  • the NE1 When the first RE indication information in the first configuration information indicates that the RE locations of the first RS are located in the same subcarrier, or are located in the same symbol, the NE1 notifies the third RE indication information carried in the third configuration information of the UE1. Instead of specifying a specific RE location, only the carrier or the symbol in which the first RS is located may be indicated to save the overhead of message transmission. Similarly, NE2 notifies the fourth RE indication information carried in the fourth configuration information of the UE2, and the second RE indication information carried in the second configuration information of the NE1 notification NE2 may also indicate only the carrier or the location where the first RS is located. Symbol to save the overhead of message delivery.
  • the RE location of the first RS sent on each antenna port may be a pilot pattern composed of other predefined RE locations.
  • the NE1 can have four antenna ports, wherein R 31 , R 32 R 33 , and R 34 are the RE positions occupied by the respective antenna ports of the first optional first RS, and R 35 , R 36 R 37 , and R 38 can be The RE position occupied by each antenna port of the second optional first RS.
  • the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port may be a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) optional pilot pattern set.
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • a plurality of optional pilot patterns of the CSI-RS are provided in the protocol, and the first RS of the embodiment of the present invention may select any one of the pilot patterns.
  • the second configuration information, the third configuration information, and the fourth configuration information may include only the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern of the CSI-RS, and the RE position occupied by the first RS indicated in the first RE indication information may be determined. .
  • the first RS is transmitted by using the pilot pattern of the CSI-RS, the existing processing procedure of the UE does not use the time-frequency resource occupied by the CSI-RS to receive or transmit data, and therefore, any pilot using the CSI-RS is adopted.
  • the pattern is used as the pilot pattern of the first RS, so that the UE can support the improvement of the network device without changing the processing flow.
  • the RE positions of the first RSs corresponding to different antenna ports in the pilot pattern may be the same, and the NE1 may adopt a code division manner, and the RE position of the first RS indicated by the pilot pattern is first from different antenna ports.
  • the RS is sent to NE2.
  • the type of the pilot pattern may be the number of antenna ports, and the network device or user of the receiver
  • the device may determine the first configuration information according to the type of the pilot pattern.
  • the type of the pilot pattern refers to a parameter included in the type indication flag of the pilot pattern determined by determining a pilot pattern.
  • the first RS may be sent by using a different pilot pattern on each antenna port, and the type indication of the pilot pattern may be A pilot pattern used to transmit the first RS for different antenna port numbers.
  • the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern may include one or more of a type of reference signal, an antenna port number, an antenna port number, and a pilot pattern index.
  • the pilot pattern index is used to indicate one of the one or more pilot patterns.
  • the type of the reference signal may include an inter-cell reference signal, a CSI-RS, a DMRS, an SRS, and the like.
  • the CSI-RS, the DMRS, and the SRS may respectively correspond to a set of selectable pilot patterns, and may adopt one or more of an antenna port number, an antenna port number, and a pilot pattern index for each pilot pattern. Mark it.
  • the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern may not include the type of the reference signal, but only the number of antenna ports and the antenna port number. One or more of the pilot pattern indexes.
  • the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern may include an antenna port number and a pilot pattern index, that is, the antenna port number is optional.
  • the NE and the UE may determine the antenna port number according to the number of antenna ports.
  • the antenna port number of the corresponding antenna port number is selected in a predetermined order from the set of antenna port numbers of the optional pilot pattern according to the number of antenna ports.
  • an antenna port that transmits a CSI-RS optional pilot pattern The number can be ⁇ 15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22 ⁇ .
  • the corresponding antenna port number is 15, when transmitting CSI-RS.
  • the type indication indicator of the pilot pattern may only include the number of antenna ports and the pilot pattern index.
  • the pilot pattern index is exemplified by the LTE protocol. There are 32 types of optional pilot patterns of the CSI-RS defined in the LTE protocol, and the pilot pattern index may be 0 to 31. In the specific implementation, the value may be different according to the specific system, and no limitation is imposed here.
  • the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern may include an antenna port number, for example, in an LTE network, sending on an antenna port with antenna port numbers 7, 8, 11, and 13.
  • the pilot pattern of the DMRS is the same pilot pattern, and the pilot pattern of the DMRS transmitted on the antenna ports of the antenna port numbers 9, 10, 12, and 14 is the same pilot pattern, and when the type of the reference signal is DMRS, the pilot is used.
  • the type indication of the pattern may include only the antenna port number. In the specific implementation, the value may be different according to the specific system, and no limitation is imposed here.
  • the pilot pattern when the type of the reference signal is SRS, the pilot pattern may be a pre-agreed pilot pattern, and the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern may only indicate the type of the reference signal.
  • the specific pre-defined pilot pattern may be a pilot pattern defined in the existing LTE protocol, or may be other pilot patterns, and is not limited herein.
  • the subframe information of the first configuration information of the first RS that is sent to the same network device may be the same, and the first RS that is sent to the same network device
  • the RE locations of the first configuration information may be the same or different. If the RE locations are the same, each of the first RSs may multiplex the same RE by using an OCC code division.
  • NE1 may be eNB1, and NE2 may be eNB2, which is optional.
  • the cells under eNB1, eNB2, and eNB3 are all 4-antenna ports.
  • the pilot patterns corresponding to the respective antenna ports may be as shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. R 31 , R 32 R 33 , R 34 are the RE positions occupied by the respective antenna ports of the first optional first RS, and R 35 , R 36 R 37 , R 38 may be the second optional first RS The RE position occupied by each antenna port.
  • R 31 , R 32 R 33 , and R 34 may send the RE position of the first RS for the four antenna ports of the eNB1, and R 35 , R 36 R 37 , and R 38 may send the four antenna ports of the eNB 2 .
  • the RE position of the first RS may be divided into OCC codes, and R 33 and R 34 may be divided by OCC codes.
  • R 35 and R 36 of eNB 2 may be divided by OCC codes, and R 37 and R 38 may be divided by OCC codes.
  • R 31 , R 32 , R 35 , and R 36 may send the RE position of the first RS for the four antenna ports of the eNB1, and R 33 , R 34 , R 37 , and R 38 are the four antenna ports of the eNB 2 . Send the RE location of the first RS.
  • NE3 NE3 there may also be of the eNB3 NE3, NE4 can also be of eNB4, R 31, R 32 may be a four-antenna transmission eNB1 position RE of the first port of the RS, R 33, R 34 may be a four eNB2
  • the antenna port sends the RE position of the first RS
  • R 35 and R 36 are RE positions that can send the first RS for the four antenna ports of the eNB3
  • R 37 and R 38 are the first RS that can be sent for the four antenna ports of the eNB4.
  • RE location RE
  • the subframe of the first RS in the first configuration information may be a dedicated subframe.
  • a general subframe may normally transmit control information such as a PDCCH, data information such as a PDSCH, a reference signal such as a CRS, and other information.
  • the dedicated subframe defined in the embodiment of the present invention is used to send the first RS, or The first RS and the control information, that is, the data information such as the PDSCH is not transmitted on the dedicated subframe.
  • the configuration of the subframe of the first RS may be configured by using an MBSFN subframe, and the configuration result of the MBSFN subframe may be specifically, and one or more subframes of the 10 subframes are MBSFN subframes.
  • the subframe of the first RS in the first configuration information may be a subframe in which a PDCCH or a CRS is transmitted, and the data included in the subframe may have several Case: the first case: only the first RS, that is, does not include PDCCH, CRS, PMCH, and other information; the second case: includes the first RS and PDCCH information, or includes the first RS and CRS Information, or including the first RS and PDCCH information and CRS information.
  • the PDCCH information in the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS may be located in the first to fourth symbols based on the second case of transmitting the first RS by using the subframe in which the PDCCH or the CRS is transmitted.
  • the transmission mode does not affect the capacity of the PDCCH information, and the impact on the normal interaction information of the UE can be reduced.
  • the subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information may be a reference signal (Demodulation Reference Signal, DMRS) for demodulation.
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • One of the set of subframe information, the first RE indication information in the first configuration information may select one of a set of DMRS selectable symbol position locations.
  • the optional subframe information and the symbol position of the DMRS may refer to the 36.211 protocol, and may also refer to definitions in other protocols, which are not limited herein.
  • the first configuration information may include at least one of indication information of a pilot pattern and indication information of a DMRS antenna port number.
  • the subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information may be one of a set of subframe information that is optional for the sounding reference signal SRS.
  • the first RE indication information in the first configuration information may select one of a set of SRS selectable symbol position locations.
  • the optional subframe information and symbol position of the SRS can be specifically referred to the 36.211 protocol, and can also refer to definitions in other protocols.
  • the manner in which the subframe information of the SRS specified in the current protocol is defined includes the period and the offset of the subframe, and the first RS in the embodiment of the present invention may also use the optional subframe information of the SRS to be sent.
  • the subframe of an RS may also include the period and offset of the subframe.
  • the optional subframe information and the symbol position transmission of the SRS are used, so that when the UE1 is notified to the UE1, the procedure of the base station notifying the UE to the SRS in the current protocol may be adopted, instead of using the newly defined message, the UE may also avoid the current protocol.
  • the method of transmitting and receiving data on the subframes and REs used by the SRS avoids transmitting and receiving data on the subframes and REs used by the first RS.
  • the subframe of the first RS may use the NE2 to indicate that the user equipment in the NE2 sends the SRS subframe
  • the first RE indication information may use the NE2 to indicate that the user equipment under the NE2 sends the RE used by the SRS.
  • the NE1 may be used.
  • the user equipment under the NE2 sends the SRS subframe and the RE sends the first RS.
  • the NE1 sends the subframe and the RE used by the first RS to the NE2, and does not use the same time-frequency resource that the user equipment under the NE2 sends the PUSCH.
  • the NE1 may pre-acquire the subframe and the RE used by the user in the S2 to send the SRS, and determine the subframe of the first RS and the first RE indication information in the optional first configuration information.
  • NE1 may not indicate that the subframe is a sending SRS subframe, but only send the first RS in an optional subframe of the SRS and an optional RE according to the manner of sending the SRS.
  • the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is optional for sending the SRS.
  • the data included in the RE of the corresponding symbol of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS may have several cases: the first case: only the first RS, that is, does not include information other than the first RS; the second case: includes both SRS information and the first RS.
  • the SRS information may be located on different subcarriers.
  • the sending process of the existing SRS may not be affected, and the first RS may be sent by using the idle RE resource in the subframe in which the SRS is sent, and the waste of the uplink resource for the UE is reduced.
  • the first case and the second case in which the first RS is sent by using the optional subframe of the SRS, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information may also be located in the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS.
  • the last symbol of the frame or the last plurality of symbols, such as one or two or three, can be referred to FIG. Since the UE transmits the SRS on the last symbol in a comb shape, the first RS can be transmitted using the blank area, so even if the first RS is transmitted, the SRS and uplink data transmission of the UE are not affected, and only the SRS capacity is reduced.
  • the subcarriers occupied by the first RS may be interval subcarriers, and the sending manner is used for uplink data of the UE.
  • the impact is small. For example, if the UE sends the first RS by 1 subcarrier, 1 RB wastes 6 subcarriers; if the UE sends the first RS by 2 subcarriers, 1 RB wastes 4 subcarriers; This type of push.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of an optional implementation manner of the first configuration information.
  • the first configuration information may include a scrambling code, where the scrambling code is used by the NE1 to perform scrambling on the first RS.
  • the scrambling code can be used as the identifier of the first RS in addition to the anti-interference capability of the first RS.
  • a network device receives a plurality of network devices and sends the reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present invention
  • NE1 sends a first RS to one NE2, and each NE1 can use its own device identifier as a scrambling code.
  • NE2 can distinguish the first RS from different network devices according to the scrambling code, and can directly discard the encryption using unintended scrambling code.
  • the scrambling code may also be an identifier of the cell, and the NE2 may further distinguish the first RS sent by the antenna port of the different CELL of the NE1.
  • the first configuration information may further include a period. That is, NE1 periodically sends the first RS to the NE2.
  • the NE1 further receives the second RS sent by the NE2 according to the fifth configuration information.
  • the fifth configuration information includes the time-frequency resource that the NE2 sends the second RS
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides an optional implementation manner of the optional method for transmitting the reference information.
  • the embodiments provided by the embodiments of the present invention further include:
  • the NE1 may send the first RS to the NE2 in the subframe information of the first RS, and the NE2 sends the second RS to the NE1 in the subframe information of the second RS.
  • the first configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS, and the fifth configuration information includes subframe information of the second RS.
  • the NE1 sends the first RS on the downlink time slot of the subframe indicated by the subframe information of the first RS, and the NE2 sends the second RS on the uplink time slot of the subframe indicated by the subframe information of the first RS.
  • the intersection of the subframe information of the first RS and the subframe information of the second RS is not empty, and the front and back segments of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS respectively include an uplink time slot and The downlink time slot, or the previous and subsequent segments of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS respectively include a downlink time slot and an uplink time slot.
  • NE1 and NE2 may belong to the same cell cooperation set, and NE1 may periodically send the first RS to NE2, and NE2 may periodically send the second RS to NE1.
  • the cell whose cell ID is an odd number is sent to be in a transmitting state, and is in a transmitting state.
  • the NE to which the cell belongs sends the first RS, and the cell whose cell ID is even is the receiving state, and the NE that is in the receiving state receives the first RS, and performs the opposite at the next transmission time, for example, the n+Tth subframe.
  • the operation that is, the cell with the cell ID of the even number is the transmission state
  • the NE to which the cell in the transmitting state belongs is the first RS
  • the cell whose cell ID is an odd number is the receiving state
  • the NE to which the cell in the receiving state belongs is the first RS.
  • the network device to which the cell with the cell ID is an odd number and the network device to which the cell with the even cell ID are assigned may adopt the method for transmitting the RS of NE1 and NE2, respectively.
  • other division manners may also be used to distinguish the cells or NEs in the transmit state and the receive state.
  • the T may be a period in which the first RS is sent
  • the first configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS
  • the fifth configuration information may include subframe information of the second RS, where the subframe information of the first RS includes a period and an offset of a subframe of the RS, the subframe information of the second RS includes a period and an offset of a subframe of the second RS, and a period of the subframe of the first RS and a subframe of the second RS
  • the period of the subframe is the same, and the offset of the subframe of the first RS is separated from the offset of the subframe of the second RS by one cycle.
  • the base station may send the RS in the same downlink time slot, and the base station of the second cell cooperation set is the uplink time slot in the time slot, and receives the RS at the same time, and may send the reverse direction in the next cycle.
  • 16 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of still another alternative embodiment of the first configuration information. It should be noted that the period of NE1 may be different from the period of NE2.
  • an optional implementation manner of the fifth first configuration information is that, for different antenna ports of one network device, the network device may send the first RS by multiplexing time-frequency resources, such as time division, frequency division, and code division. To reduce the waste of uplink resources or downlink resources of the UE.
  • the optional implementation manner of the sixth first configuration information is that, for a one-to-many or many-to-many reference signal transmission scenario, the network device may use time division, frequency division, code division, etc. to reuse time-frequency resources. The way to reduce the waste of uplink resources or downlink resources of the UE.
  • the content of the second configuration information, the third configuration information, and the fourth configuration information may be respectively a subset of the first configuration information, and the content included may be different, and only the first configuration information may be determined according to the second configuration information.
  • the time-frequency resource of the RS is transmitted to ensure that the NE2 can receive the first RS; and, according to the third configuration information, the time-frequency resource that may collide with the UE that receives the third configuration information may be determined to ensure that the time-frequency resource may be received.
  • the UE of the third configuration information does not receive the data by mistake; and, according to the fourth configuration information, the time-frequency resource that may collide with the UE that receives the fourth configuration information may be determined to ensure that the UE that receives the fourth configuration information is received.
  • the data will not be sent by mistake, and thus will not affect the NE2 receiving the first RS.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides several optional implementations of the second configuration information, the third configuration information, and the fourth configuration information.
  • the NE1 sends the second configuration information to the NE2, where the second configuration information may include the subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information, and/ Or, the second RE indicates information;
  • the second RE indication information may include: a first RE indication information in the first configuration information, or a symbol in which the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is located, or The sub-carrier in which the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is located, or the NE1 sends a type indication identifier of a pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port used by the first RS.
  • the NE1 sends the third configuration information to the UE1.
  • the third configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS of the first configuration information, and/or third RE indication information;
  • the third RE indication information includes: the first RE indication information, or the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information, or the first RE indication The subcarriers in which the REs occupied by the first RS are indicated by the information, or the type indication identifiers of the pilot patterns corresponding to the respective antenna ports of the NE1.
  • the fourth configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information, and fourth RE indication information;
  • the fourth RE indication information includes: an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information, or an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information.
  • the NE2 may send the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using a resource block configuration Resource Block Assignment message.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a new message format in which the fourth type network device sends the third configuration information and the fourth configuration information, which is the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the three configuration information and the fourth configuration information may be sent using at least one of the following message formats.
  • the first RS may be referred to as a cell to cell (C2C) reference signal.
  • C2C cell to cell
  • the configuration of the small-area reference signal and the new cell format are as follows.
  • the first type of new message format is the new cell in RRC signaling.
  • the configuration information of the newly added inter-cell reference signal may include a period of the first RS, a time-frequency resource, a number of antenna ports, and the like.
  • the second type of new message format is the new cell in the broadcast message.
  • the new broadcast message can be packaged in the message format.
  • Broadcast messages can be sent over the PBCH.
  • the new cells in the MIB message are as follows:
  • the third type of new message format is the new cell in the physical layer signaling.
  • the message format of the new physical layer signaling includes two types, and the first physical layer signaling is used to indicate the available time-frequency resources of the downlink data.
  • the configuration of the C2C RS may be added to the DCI.
  • the flag bit C2C RS indicator is used to indicate the RE position occupied by the first RS.
  • the enumerated value of the flag bit may correspond to one or more pilot patterns.
  • the The flag bit may carry the type indication identifier of the foregoing pilot pattern, for example, may be a reference signal type or an antenna port number or an antenna port number or an index of one pilot pattern, or the like. Specifically, add the following information to DCI:
  • the second physical layer signaling is used to indicate available time-frequency resources of the uplink data.
  • the configuration indication of the C2C RS may be added in the DCI, and the flag CSC RS symbol indicator may only indicate the symbol occupied by the first RS. Specifically, add the following information to DCI:
  • the interval subcarrier sends the first RS, and, for example, shares the subframe with the SRS, and then If the inter-cell reference signal of the interactive network device is transmitted through the shared time slot, the transmission code rate of the network device can be improved.
  • the formula for calculating the code rate is:
  • the transmission code rate of the network device can be improved.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides four optional embodiments in which the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2.
  • NE1 can send the first RS to NE2 through the digital beam and the analog beam.
  • the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2, which may specifically include: The NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2 in a non-beam form;
  • the sending, by the NE1, the scheduling result of the first downlink data and the first downlink data to the NE2, the method may include: sending, by the NE1, the precoding matrix of the first downlink data to the NE2, so that the The NE2 obtains the first channel that is not precoded according to the first RS that is sent in the form of a non-beam, and according to the first channel that is not precoded, the precoding matrix of the first downlink data, and the The scheduling result of the first downlink data restores the first interference signal.
  • the first downlink data may be uncoded or encoded. If the first downlink data is uncoded, the precoding matrix needs to be sent to the NE2.
  • the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2, which may specifically include: the NE1.
  • the first RS is transmitted to the NE2 in the form of an analog beam.
  • the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2, which may specifically include: The NE1 transmits the first RS to the NE2 in the form of a digital beam.
  • the NE1 sends the first downlink data to the UE2 in the form of a digital beam
  • the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2, and the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2 in the form of a digital beam.
  • the NE1 sends the first downlink data in the form of a digital beam and the scheduling result of the first downlink data to the NE2.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the network device provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be used as the first network device NE1, and the NE1 may include:
  • the first transceiver module 11 is configured to send, by using the first configuration information, the first reference signal RS to the second network device NE2 to which the second cell CELL2 belongs according to the first configuration information; the first configuration information includes And indicating information about a time-frequency resource used by the NE1 to send the first RS.
  • the first RS is used by the NE2 to cancel the interference of the NE1 on the first uplink data according to the first RS, where the first uplink data is from a user equipment under the NE2.
  • the NE1 further includes:
  • the processing module 12 is configured to detect that the ratio of the uplink and downlink subframes of the CELL1 and the CELL2 is inconsistent.
  • the NE1 may further include:
  • the second transceiver module 13 is configured to send, to the NE2, a scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data, where the first downlink data is sent by the NE1 to the first cell of the NE1 CELL1 serves the user's device.
  • the second transceiver module 13 may be configured to send the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data to the NE2 by using an X2 interface between the NE1 and the NE2. Scheduling results.
  • the first configuration information includes:
  • Subframe information of the first RS and/or,
  • the first resource unit RE indicates information, and the first RE indication information is used to indicate an RE occupied by the first RS.
  • the first cell of the NE1 includes at least one antenna port, and the first RE indication information includes:
  • pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port of the CELL1, where the pilot pattern is used to indicate that each antenna port of the first cell sends the RE of the first RS.
  • At least one of the pilot patterns corresponding to the antenna ports of the NE1 belongs to a channel pattern information reference signal CSI-RS selectable pilot pattern set.
  • the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS belongs to a set of selectable subframes of the sounding reference signal SRS of the NE2.
  • the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is different from the RE used by the SRS under the NE2; and/or; the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information and the SRS used by the NE2
  • the subcarriers in which the REs are located are different; and/or; the REs occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information are different from the symbols of the REs used by the SRSs under the NE2.
  • the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is the last symbol of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS.
  • the subframe information of the first RS is a dedicated subframe, and the dedicated subframe carries the first RS.
  • the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS may include only the first RS, or
  • the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS may include the first RS and physical downlink control channel PDCCH information, or include the first RS and CRS information, or include the first RS and PDCCH information. And CRS information.
  • the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS includes the first RS and the PDCCH in a subframe.
  • Information, the PDCCH information is located in the first to fourth symbols.
  • the first configuration information further includes a scrambling code, where the scrambling code is used by the NE1 to scramble the first RS.
  • the second transceiver module 13 is further configured to send the second configuration information to the NE2, where the second configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information, and Or, the second RE indicates information;
  • the second RE indication information includes: the first RE indication information in the first configuration information, or
  • the type of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port used by an RS indicates at least one of the three items.
  • the processing module 14 is further configured to determine, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the downlink data is sent to the first user equipment UE1 served by the first cell.
  • the first transceiver module 11 is further configured to send third configuration information to the UE1.
  • the third configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS of the first configuration information, and/or third RE indication information;
  • the third RE indication information includes: the first RE indication information, or,
  • the type of the corresponding pilot pattern indicates at least one of the three items.
  • the first transceiver module 11 is specifically configured to send the third configuration information by using a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information.
  • the first transceiver module 11 is specifically configured to send the third configuration information by using high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling.
  • the high layer signaling includes a radio resource control RRC message.
  • the RRC message includes a primary system information block MIB message, or a system information block SIB message.
  • the physical layer signaling includes data control indication information DCI.
  • the third configuration information includes the third RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE overlaps with the RE of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH of the UE1;
  • the first transceiver module 11 is specifically configured to send the third configuration information to the UE1 by using UE-specific information, where the third configuration information includes third RE indication information, where the third RE indication information indicates The RE that conflicts with the PDSCH of the UE1 by the first RS indicates that the first RE indicates the intersection of the RE occupied by the first RS and the PDSCH of the UE1.
  • the third configuration information includes the subframe information of the first RS and the third RE indication information, where the first transceiver module 11 is specifically configured to send the first message to the UE1 by using a broadcast message. And the first transceiver module 11 is further configured to send the third RE indication information in the third configuration information to the UE1 by using UE-specific information. .
  • the first transceiver module 11 is further configured to receive, according to the fifth configuration information, the second RS that is sent by the NE2, where the fifth configuration information includes, when the NE2 sends the second RS Frequency resources.
  • the first configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS
  • the fifth configuration information includes subframe information of the second RS
  • the first transceiver module 11 is further configured to send the first RS on a subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS, where
  • the first transceiver module 11 is further configured to receive the second RS on a subframe determined by the subframe information of the second RS.
  • the intersection of the subframe information determined by the subframe information of the first RS and the subframe information of the second RS is not empty, and the preceding and following segments of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS are The uplink time slot and the downlink time slot are respectively included, or the first and the last segments of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS respectively include a downlink time slot and an uplink time slot;
  • the first transceiver module 11 is further configured to send the first RS on a downlink time slot of a subframe indicated by the subframe information of the first RS, and indicate the subframe information in the first RS.
  • the second RS is received on an uplink time slot of a subframe.
  • the first configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS
  • the fifth configuration information includes subframe information of the second RS
  • the subframe information of the first RS includes the first The period and the offset of the subframe of the RS
  • the subframe information of the second RS includes the period and the offset of the subframe of the second RS
  • the period of the subframe of the first RS and the subframe of the second RS The period is the same, the offset of the subframe of the first RS is separated from the offset of the subframe of the second RS by one cycle;
  • the first transceiver module is further configured to periodically send the first RS to the NE2, and periodically receive the second RS sent by the NE2.
  • the first transceiver module 11 receives the second RS sent by each antenna port of the CELL2 of the NE2 through each antenna port of the CELL1.
  • the subframe information of the second RS is determined by the NE2 according to the cell identifier of the CELL2.
  • the cell identifier of the CELL2 is an even number
  • the cell identifier of the CELL1 is an odd number
  • the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS is a first subframe
  • the subframe information of the second RS is The determined subframe is a second subframe
  • the second subframe is a subframe of a period of one subframe of the first RS after the first subframe;
  • the cell identifier of the CELL2 is an odd number
  • the cell identifier of the CELL1 is an even number.
  • the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS is a first subframe
  • the subframe determined by the subframe information of the second RS is a subframe.
  • the second subframe is a subframe of a period of one subframe of the first RS after the first subframe.
  • the first transceiver module 11 is configured to send the first RS to each antenna port of the CELL2 of the NE2 through each antenna port of the CELL1.
  • the subframe information of the first RS is determined by the NE1 according to the cell identifier of the CELL1.
  • the CELL1 and the CELL2 belong to a cell cooperation set.
  • the network device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 16 , and the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of still another network device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the network device provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be used as the second network device NE2, and the NE2 may include:
  • the NE2 may further include a processing module 22, configured to remove interference of the NE1 on the first uplink data according to the first RS, where the first uplink data is from a user equipment under the NE2.
  • a processing module 22 configured to remove interference of the NE1 on the first uplink data according to the first RS, where the first uplink data is from a user equipment under the NE2.
  • the processing module 22 is configured to obtain, according to the first RS, a first channel between the NE1 and the NE2;
  • the NE2 may include a second transceiver module 13 configured to receive a scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data sent by the NE1, where the first downlink data is the NE1 is sent to the user equipment under the NE1;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to restore the first interference signal according to at least one of the first downlink data and the scheduling result of the first downlink data, and the first channel.
  • the second transceiver module 23 is configured to receive, by using an X2 interface between the NE2 and the NE1, a scheduling result of the first downlink data and the first downlink data.
  • the first configuration information includes:
  • the subframe information of the first RS and,
  • the first resource unit RE indicates information, and the first RE indication information is used to indicate an RE occupied by the first RS.
  • the second transceiver module 23 is further configured to receive second configuration information that is sent by the NE1, where the second configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS, and/or a second RE Indication information;
  • the second RE indication information includes: an RE location of the first RS, or a symbol in which the RE occupied by the first RS is located and a subcarrier where the RE occupied by the first RS is located, and the CELL1 Sending, by the type of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port used by the first RS, at least one of the three items;
  • the processing module 22 is further configured to determine the first configuration information according to the second configuration information.
  • the processing module 22 is further configured to determine, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the second user equipment UE2 served by the CELL2 sends uplink data.
  • the first transceiver module 21 is further configured to send fourth configuration information to the UE2.
  • the fourth configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information, and/or fourth RE indication information;
  • the fourth RE indication information includes: an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information, or an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information. And a symbol, or a subcarrier in which the RE of the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is located, or at least one of a type indication identifier of a pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port of the CELL1.
  • the first transceiver module 21 is specifically configured to send the third configuration information by using a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information.
  • the first transceiver module 21 is specifically configured to send the third configuration information by using high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling.
  • the high layer signaling includes a radio resource control RRC message.
  • the RRC message includes a primary system information block MIB message, or a system information block SIB message.
  • the physical layer signaling includes data control indication information DCI.
  • the first configuration information includes the first RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information overlaps with the RE of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH of the UE2;
  • the first transceiver module 21 is further configured to send the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using UE-specific information, where the fourth configuration information includes fourth RE indication information, and the fourth RE indication information indicates The RE location of the PUSCH in which the RE of the first RS is occupied by the first RS indicates the intersection of the RE location indicated by the first RE indication information and the PUSCH of the UE2.
  • the fourth configuration information includes a subframe of the first RS and the fourth RE indication information, where The first transceiver module 21 is configured to send the subframe information of the first RS in the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using a broadcast message.
  • the first transceiver module 21 is specifically configured to send the fourth RE indication information in the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using UE-specific information.
  • the network device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 16 , and the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the user equipment provided by the embodiment of the present invention may include:
  • the processing module 32 is configured to determine, according to the third configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when receiving data or transmitting data.
  • the third configuration information is used to indicate all or part of the time-frequency resources occupied by the first reference signal RS, where the first RS is the first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs to the second cell CELL2. Two network devices sent by NE2.
  • the user equipment may further include:
  • the transceiver module 31 is configured to receive the third configuration information.
  • the transceiver module 31 is configured to receive a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information, where the broadcast message and/or the UE-specific information includes the third configuration information.
  • the transceiver module 31 is configured to receive high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling, where the high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling includes the third configuration information.
  • the high layer signaling includes a radio resource control RRC message.
  • the RRC message includes a primary system information block MIB message, or a system information block SIB message.
  • the physical layer signaling includes data control indication information DCI.
  • the third configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS, and/or third RE indication information,
  • the third RE indication information includes: an RE location occupied by the first RS, or
  • the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS is at least one of three types of the pilot pattern of the pilot pattern in which the RE of the first RS is located and the type of the pilot pattern corresponding to the RE occupied by the first RS.
  • the serving cell of the user equipment is CELL1
  • the third configuration information is sent by the NE1
  • the processing module 32 may be specifically configured to determine, when the data is received, according to the third configuration information. Frequency resources.
  • the third configuration information includes the third RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE overlaps with the RE of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH of the user equipment,
  • the transceiver module 31 is configured to receive the third configuration information by using the UE-specific information sent by the NE1, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the processing module 32 determines the received data is the PDSCH of the user equipment.
  • the user equipment serving cell is CELL2
  • the third configuration information is sent by the NE2
  • the processing module 32 may be specifically configured to determine, according to the third configuration information, a time frequency that is available when sending data. Resources.
  • the third configuration information includes a third RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE indication information overlaps with the RE of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH of the user equipment;
  • the transceiver module 31 is configured to receive the third configuration information by using the UE-specific information sent by the NE2, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the processing module 32 determines the data to be sent is An RE in the PUSCH that does not overlap with the RE occupied by the first RS.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of an optional network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a network device, where the network device has a function of implementing behavior of a first network device in the foregoing method.
  • the structure of the network device includes a wireless communication interface 111, which may be, for example, a transmitter and a receiver, and a network communication interface 113.
  • the wireless communication interface is configured to support communication between the network device and the network device and the user equipment, and the transmitter is configured to send information or data involved in the foregoing method to the network device and the user equipment, where the receiver is used to support the network.
  • the device receives information or data sent by the network device and the user equipment involved in the foregoing method, and the network communication interface is used to support communication between the network device and the network device.
  • a demodulator and/or a decoder may also be included in the structure of the network device.
  • the demodulator is configured to demodulate or despread and demodulate information or data involved in the above method; the decoder is configured to decode or descramble information or data involved in the above method And decoding.
  • the processor 112 may also be included in the structure of the network device.
  • the processor is configured to support a network device to perform a corresponding function of the above methods. It can be understood that when the demodulator and/or decoder are not included in the structure of the network device, the functions of the demodulator and/or decoder may also be at the receiver or the Completed in the processor.
  • the network device can also include a memory 114 for coupling with the processor to hold program instructions and data necessary for the network device.
  • the network device may also include an interface unit for supporting communication with other network devices, such as communication with a core network node.
  • the wireless communication interface may be used to send or receive the first reference signal sent by the other network device to the network device, or may be used to send the third configuration information or the fourth configuration information to the user equipment.
  • Figure 20 only shows a simplified design of the network device.
  • the network device may include any number of transmitters, receivers, processors, memories, etc., and all the network devices that can implement the embodiments of the present invention are within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of another network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a network device, where the network device has a function of implementing behavior of a second network device in the foregoing method.
  • the structure of the network device includes a wireless communication interface 121, which may be, for example, a transmitter and a receiver, and a network communication interface 123.
  • the wireless communication interface is configured to support communication between the network device and the network device and the user equipment, and the transmitter is configured to send information or data involved in the foregoing method to the network device and the user equipment, where the receiver is used to support the network.
  • the device receives information or data sent by the network device and the user equipment involved in the foregoing method, and the network communication interface is used to support communication between the network device and the network device.
  • a demodulator and/or a decoder may also be included in the structure of the network device.
  • the demodulator is configured to demodulate or despread and demodulate information or data involved in the above method; the decoder is configured to decode or descramble information or data involved in the above method And decoding.
  • the processor 122 may also be included in the structure of the network device.
  • the processor is configured to support a network device to perform a corresponding function of the above methods. It can be understood that when the demodulator and/or decoder are not included in the structure of the network device, the functions of the demodulator and/or decoder may also be at the receiver or the Completed in the processor.
  • the network device can also include a memory 124 for coupling with the processor to store program instructions and data necessary for the network device.
  • the network device may also include an interface unit for supporting communication with other network devices, such as communication with a core network node.
  • the wireless communication interface may be used to send or receive the first reference signal sent by the other network device to the network device, or may be used to send the third configuration information or the fourth configuration information to the user equipment.
  • Figure 21 only shows a simplified design of the network device.
  • the network The network device may include any number of transmitters, receivers, processors, memories, etc., and all network devices that can implement the embodiments of the present invention are within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of an optional user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a user equipment.
  • the structure of the user equipment includes a transceiver 131, which may be, for example, a receiver and a transmitter.
  • the transmitter is configured to support the user equipment to send information or data involved in the foregoing method to the network device
  • the receiver is configured to support the user equipment to receive information or data sent by the network device involved in the foregoing method.
  • an encoder and/or a modulator may also be included in the structure of the user equipment.
  • the encoder is used to encode or encode and scramble the information or data involved in the above method; the modulator is used to modulate or modulate and spread the information or data involved in the above method.
  • the user equipment may further include a processor 132.
  • the processor is configured to support a user device to perform a corresponding function in the above method. It can be understood that when the modulator and/or the encoder are not included in the structure of the user equipment, the functions of the modulator and/or the encoder may also be in the transmitter or the processor. carry out.
  • the user equipment may also include a memory 134 for coupling with the processor to store program instructions and data necessary for the user equipment.
  • the wireless communication interface may be configured to receive, by the network device, third configuration information or fourth configuration information.
  • Figure 22 only shows a simplified design of the user equipment.
  • the user equipment may include any number of transmitters, receivers, processors, memories, etc., and all network devices that can implement the embodiments of the present invention are within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present invention.
  • the embodiment of the invention provides a communication system, which comprises the network device and the user equipment described in the above aspects.
  • the above embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer program instructions When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present invention are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transfer to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD)).
  • embodiments of the embodiments of the invention may be provided as a method, system, or computer program product.
  • embodiments of the invention may be in the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • embodiments of the invention may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) including computer usable program code.
  • Embodiments of the present invention refer to a method, a device (system), and a computer according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the flow chart and/or block diagram of the program product is described. It will be understood that each flow and/or block of the flowchart illustrations and/or FIG.
  • These computer program instructions can be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor, or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine for the execution of instructions for execution by a processor of a computer or other programmable data processing device.
  • the computer program instructions can also be stored in a computer readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer readable memory produce an article of manufacture comprising the instruction device.
  • the apparatus implements the functions specified in one or more blocks of a flow or a flow and/or block diagram of the flowchart.
  • These computer program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device such that a series of operational steps are performed on a computer or other programmable device to produce computer-implemented processing for execution on a computer or other programmable device.
  • the instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more of the flow or in a block or blocks of a flow diagram.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided in an embodiment of the invention are a method and device for transmitting a reference signal, a network apparatus, and a user equipment unit. The method comprises: a first network apparatus (NE1) to which a first cell (CELL1) belongs transmitting, according to first configuration information, a first reference signal (RS) to a second network apparatus (NE2) to which a second cell (CELL2) belongs, the first configuration information comprising information for indicating a time-frequency resource used by the NE1 to transmit the first RS. The method for transmitting a reference signal provided in the embodiment of the invention can solve a problem in the prior art in which interference results in a high bit error rate of uplink data.

Description

参考信号的传输方法及装置、网络设备和用户设备Reference signal transmission method and device, network device and user equipment 技术领域Technical field
本发明实施例涉及无线通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种参考信号的传输方法及装置、网络设备和用户设备。The embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of wireless communications technologies, and in particular, to a method and a device for transmitting a reference signal, a network device, and a user equipment.
背景技术Background technique
随着第三代无线通信技术在全球的普及使用和长期演进Term Evolution,LTE)技术时代的到来,移动网络数据传输速率和数据总量需求迅速增长对频谱资源的利用提出了更高的要求。With the advent of the third generation of wireless communication technology and the long-term evolution of the Term Evolution (LTE) technology, the rapid growth of mobile network data transmission rate and total data demand puts forward higher requirements for the utilization of spectrum resources.
为了提升频谱资源的利用率,LTE频分双工(Frequency Division Duplex,FDD)技术根据频率区分发射和接收信道,LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex,TDD)技术根据时隙来区分发射和接收信道。In order to improve the utilization of spectrum resources, LTE Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) technology distinguishes transmit and receive channels according to frequency, and LTE Time Division Duplex (TDD) technology distinguishes transmit and receive channels according to time slots. .
但是,当多个LTE小区配置相同的工作频率范围时,相邻或相近的第一基站和第二基站在收发数据时,第一基站的下行信号会对第二基站的上行信号产生一定干扰,进而导致第二基站下的用户设备发送上行数据误码率高。However, when multiple LTE cells are configured with the same working frequency range, when the adjacent or similar first base station and the second base station transmit and receive data, the downlink signal of the first base station may interfere with the uplink signal of the second base station. The error rate of the uplink data sent by the user equipment under the second base station is high.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本发明实施例提供一种参考信号的传输方法及装置、网络设备和用户设备,用于解决现有技术中由于干扰导致上行数据误码率高的问题。The embodiment of the invention provides a method and a device for transmitting a reference signal, a network device and a user equipment, which are used to solve the problem of high error rate of uplink data due to interference in the prior art.
本发明实施例的第一方面提供一种参考信号的传输方法,包括:A first aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for transmitting a reference signal, including:
第一小区CELL1所属的第一网络设备NE1根据第一配置信息向第二小区CELL2所属的第二网络设备NE2发送第一参考信号RS;所述第一配置信息用于指示包括所述NE1发送所述第一RS发送时使用的时频资源的信息。The first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs sends the first reference signal RS to the second network device NE2 to which the second cell CELL2 belongs according to the first configuration information; the first configuration information is used to indicate that the NE1 sending station is included. The information of the time-frequency resource used when the first RS is transmitted is described.
其中,CELL1和CELL2分别用于向NE1和NE2下的用户设备提供网络接入服务。CELL1与CELL2可以是相邻或者同覆盖的小区,NE1可以通过CELL1的各个天线端口向NE2的各个天线端口发送第一RS。Among them, CELL1 and CELL2 are respectively used to provide network access services to user equipments under NE1 and NE2. CELL1 and CELL2 may be adjacent or identically covered cells, and NE1 may send the first RS to each antenna port of NE2 through each antenna port of CELL1.
所述第一RS用于所述NE2根据所述第一RS消除所述NE1对第一上行数据的干扰,所述第一上行数据来自所述NE2下的用户设备。The first RS is used by the NE2 to cancel the interference of the NE1 on the first uplink data according to the first RS, where the first uplink data is from a user equipment under the NE2.
所述NE1通过CELL1的天线端口向所述NE2的CELL2的天线端口发送所述第一RS,则在所述NE1根据第一配置信息向NE2发送第一RS之前,包括:The NE1 sends the first RS to the antenna port of the CELL2 of the NE2 through the antenna port of the CELL1, and before the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2 according to the first configuration information, the method includes:
所述NE1检测到所述CELL1与所述CELL2的上下行子帧配比不一致。The NE1 detects that the ratio of the uplink and downlink subframes of the CELL1 and the CELL2 is inconsistent.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式中,所述传输方法还包括:In conjunction with the first aspect, in a first optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the transmitting method further includes:
所述NE1向所述NE2发送第一下行数据和/或第一下行数据的调度结果;所述第一下行数据为所述NE1发送给所述NE1的第一小区CELL1服务的用户设备的。The NE1 sends a scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data to the NE2; the first downlink data is a user equipment that is sent by the NE1 to the first cell CELL1 of the NE1. of.
其中,第一下行数据可以是NE1在对NE2的第一上行数据产生干扰的子帧上向所服务UE发送的下行数据或者NE1在对NE2的第一上行数据产生干扰的子帧上发送的任一 下行数据。The first downlink data may be downlink data sent by the NE1 to the served UE in a subframe that interferes with the first uplink data of the NE2, or sent by the NE1 in a subframe that interferes with the first uplink data of the NE2. Either Downstream data.
可选的,第一下行数据的调度结果可以包括但不限于传输模式、资源位置、调制方式、预编码矩阵等中的至少一项。Optionally, the scheduling result of the first downlink data may include, but is not limited to, at least one of a transmission mode, a resource location, a modulation mode, a precoding matrix, and the like.
一般地,NE1需要告知NE2在可能产生干扰的子帧上NE1调度的UE的下行数据以及调度信息,即第一下行数据和第一下行数据的调度结果,以便于NE2将干扰信息还原。In general, the NE1 needs to inform the NE2 of the downlink data of the UE scheduled by the NE1 and the scheduling information, that is, the scheduling result of the first downlink data and the first downlink data, in order to facilitate the NE2 to restore the interference information.
可选的,NE1也可以只发送第一下行数据,而不发送第一下行数据的调度结果。例如,第一下行数据可以采用预定义的MCS或者传输模式发送。又如,对于传输模式简单的传输方式,具体如CELL1为单天线或者采用发送分集的发送方式,NE1发送的第一下行数据为经过预编码矩阵处理后的第一下行数据,则NE1也可以不发送第一下行数据的调度结果。Optionally, the NE1 may also send only the first downlink data, but does not send the scheduling result of the first downlink data. For example, the first downlink data may be transmitted using a predefined MCS or transmission mode. For example, for a transmission mode with a simple transmission mode, for example, if CELL1 is a single antenna or a transmission method using transmission diversity, and the first downlink data sent by NE1 is the first downlink data processed by the precoding matrix, NE1 is also The scheduling result of the first downlink data may not be transmitted.
或者,可选的,NE1也可以不发送第一下行数据,只发送第一下行数据的调度结果。例如,NE1下的UE可以链接到多个小区,即UE除了链接到NE1的CELL1之外,还链接到NE2的CELL2,则CELL1归属的NE1和CELL2归属的NE2上已经预存该UE的下行数据。Alternatively, optionally, the NE1 may not send the first downlink data, but only the scheduling result of the first downlink data. For example, the UE under NE1 may be linked to multiple cells, that is, the UE is linked to the CELL1 of the NE1 in addition to the CELL1 of the NE1, and the downlink data of the UE is pre-stored on the NE2 to which the CELL1 belongs and the NE2 to which the CELL2 belongs.
可选的,NE1向NE2发送第一下行数据和/或第一下行数据的调度结果可以采用有线或者无线的方式发送,使用无线方式发送时可以使用与用户设备发送数据不同的资源发送。Optionally, the scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data sent by the NE1 to the NE2 may be sent by using a wired or wireless manner, and may be sent by using a resource different from the data sent by the user equipment when transmitting by using a wireless manner.
可选的,所述NE1通过所述NE1与所述NE2之间的X2接口向所述NE2发送所述第一下行数据和/或所述第一下行数据的调度结果。Optionally, the NE1 sends the scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data to the NE2 by using an X2 interface between the NE1 and the NE2.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第二种可选的实施方式中,所述第一配置信息可以包括:With reference to the first aspect, the optional embodiment of the first optional embodiment of the first aspect, in the second optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the first configuration information may include :
所述第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,Subframe information of the first RS, and/or,
第一资源单元RE指示信息,所述第一RE指示信息用于指示所述第一RS占用的RE。The first resource unit RE indicates information, and the first RE indication information is used to indicate an RE occupied by the first RS.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第二种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第三种可选的实施方式中,所述NE1的第一小区包括至少一个天线端口,则所述第一RE指示信息包括:With reference to the first aspect, the optional embodiment of any one of the first to the second aspect, in the third optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the first cell of the NE1 includes at least An antenna port, where the first RE indication information includes:
与所述CELL1的各个天线端口对应的导频图案,所述导频图案用于指示所述第一小区的各个天线端口发送所述第一RS的RE。And a pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port of the CELL1, where the pilot pattern is used to indicate that each antenna port of the first cell sends the RE of the first RS.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第三种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第四种可选的实施方式中,所述NE1的各个天线端口对应的导频图案中的至少一种属于信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS可选的导频图案集合。With reference to the first aspect, the optional implementation manner of any one of the first to third aspects of the first aspect, in a fourth optional implementation manner of the first aspect, each antenna port of the NE1 corresponds to At least one of the pilot patterns belongs to a set of pilot patterns selectable by the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第四种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第五种可选的实施方式中,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧属于NE2的探测参考信号SRS可选的子帧的集合。以减少对NE2下的用户设备的上行数据的影响。With reference to the first aspect, the optional implementation manner of any one of the first to fourth aspects of the first aspect, in a fifth optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the subframe information of the first RS The determined subframe belongs to a set of optional subframes of the sounding reference signal SRS of NE2. To reduce the impact on the uplink data of the user equipment under NE2.
可选的,第一RE指示信息指示的第一RS占用的RE与NE2下的SRS使用的RE不同;和/或;第一RE指示信息指示的第一RS占用的RE与NE2下的SRS使用的RE所在的子载波不同;和/或;第一RE指示信息指示的第一RS占用的RE与NE2下的SRS使用的RE所在的符号不同。Optionally, the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is different from the RE used by the SRS under the NE2; and/or; the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information and the SRS used by the NE2 The subcarriers in which the REs are located are different; and/or; the REs occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information are different from the symbols of the REs used by the SRSs under the NE2.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第四种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的 第五种可选的实施方式中,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号为所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧的最后一个符号。In combination with the first aspect, the optional embodiment of any one of the first to fourth aspects of the first aspect, in the first aspect In a fifth optional implementation, the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is the last symbol of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第五种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第六种可选的实施方式中,所述第一RS的子帧信息为专用子帧,所述专用子帧承载所述第一RS。其中,该专用子帧上可以不传输数据信息,而只传输控制信息和参考信号。With reference to the first aspect, the optional implementation manner of any one of the first to fifth aspects of the first aspect, in a sixth optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the subframe information of the first RS For a dedicated subframe, the dedicated subframe carries the first RS. The data frame information may not be transmitted on the dedicated subframe, but only the control information and the reference signal are transmitted.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第六种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第七种可选的实施方式中,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧中只包含所述第一RS,或者,With reference to the first aspect, the optional implementation manner of any one of the first to sixth aspects of the first aspect, in a seventh optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the subframe information of the first RS Determining only the first RS in the determined subframe, or
所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧中包含所述第一RS和物理下行控制信道PDCCH信息,或者包含所述第一RS和CRS信息,或者包含所述第一RS和PDCCH信息和CRS信息。当采用在专用子帧中同时发送PDCCH和第一RS的方式发送第一RS可以避免对NE1下用户设备的PDCCH的影响。The subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS includes the first RS and physical downlink control channel PDCCH information, or includes the first RS and CRS information, or includes the first RS and PDCCH information, and CRS information. When the first RS is transmitted in a manner of simultaneously transmitting the PDCCH and the first RS in the dedicated subframe, the influence on the PDCCH of the user equipment under the NE1 may be avoided.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第七种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第八种可选的实施方式中,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧中同时包含所述第一RS与所述PDCCH信息,所述PDCCH信息位于第1至第4个符号。With reference to the first aspect, the optional implementation manner of any one of the first to seventh aspects of the first aspect, in the eighth optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the subframe information of the first RS The determined subframe includes the first RS and the PDCCH information, and the PDCCH information is located in the first to fourth symbols.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第八种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第九种可选的实施方式中,所述第一配置信息还包括扰码,所述扰码用于所述NE1对所述第一RS进行加扰。With reference to the first aspect, the optional implementation of any one of the first to eighth aspects of the first aspect, in the ninth optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the first configuration information further includes And the scrambling code is used by the NE1 to scramble the first RS.
可选的,所述扰码可以为所述第一小区的标识,所述扰码可以用于指示第一RS对应于所述第一小区。可选的,所述扰码也可以为所述NE1的标识,此时,所述扰码可以用于指示第一RS对应于所述NE1。Optionally, the scrambling code may be an identifier of the first cell, where the scrambling code may be used to indicate that the first RS corresponds to the first cell. Optionally, the scrambling code may also be an identifier of the NE1. In this case, the scrambling code may be used to indicate that the first RS corresponds to the NE1.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第九种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第十种可选的实施方式中,在所述NE1根据第一配置信息向NE2发送第一RS之前,包括:With reference to the first aspect, the optional implementation manner of any one of the first to the ninth aspects of the first aspect, in the tenth optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the NE1 is configured according to the first configuration information Before sending the first RS to NE2, it includes:
所述NE1向所述NE2发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息包括所述第一配置信息中的第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第二RE指示信息;The NE1 sends the second configuration information to the NE2, where the second configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information, and/or second RE indication information;
其中,所述第二RE指示信息包括:所述第一配置信息中的第一RE指示信息,或者,The second RE indication information includes: the first RE indication information in the first configuration information, or
所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号与所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波与所述NE1发送所述第一RS使用的各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识三项中至少一项。Transmitting, by the first RE indication information, the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS and the subcarrier where the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is sent by the NE1 The type of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port used by an RS indicates at least one of the three items.
需要说明的是,导频图案的类型是指由确定一个导频图案的包括在导频图案的类型指示标识中的参数,导频图案的类型指示标识可以包括:参考信号的类型、天线端口数、天线端口号、导频图案索引中一种或者多种。其中,导频图案索引用于指示一个或者多个导频图案中的一个导频图案。可选的,参考信号的类型可以包括小区间参考信号、CSI-RS、DMRS、SRS等。It should be noted that the type of the pilot pattern refers to a parameter that is included in the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern that determines a pilot pattern. The type indication identifier of the pilot pattern may include: a type of the reference signal, and an antenna port number. One or more of an antenna port number and a pilot pattern index. The pilot pattern index is used to indicate one of the one or more pilot patterns. Optionally, the type of the reference signal may include an inter-cell reference signal, a CSI-RS, a DMRS, an SRS, and the like.
还需要说明的是,第二配置信息中可以包括第一RS的子帧信息和/或第二RE指示信息。第二配置信息可以用于确定第一配置信息。It should be noted that the second configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS and/or second RE indication information. The second configuration information can be used to determine the first configuration information.
一种可能的情况中,NE2可以预先存储部分第一配置信息或者不存储第一配置信息,则NE1发送给NE2的第二配置信息可以只包含缺少的第一配置信息,例如,NE2预先存 储了第一RS的子帧和第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波,则NE1可以向NE2发送包含第一RS占用的RE所在的符号的第二配置信息,NE2可以根据第二配置信息和预先存储的部分第一配置信息确定接收第一RS的时频资源;又如,NE2未存储第一配置信息,则NE1可以将包含全部第一配置信息的第二配置信息发送给NE2,即第二配置信息包含第一RS的子帧信息和第二RE指示信息,其中,第二RE指示信息包含第一RS占用的RE。In a possible case, the NE2 may pre-store part of the first configuration information or not the first configuration information, and the second configuration information sent by the NE1 to the NE2 may include only the first configuration information that is missing, for example, the NE2 is pre-stored. The second configuration information of the symbol in which the RE of the first RS is located may be sent to the NE2, and the NE2 may send the second configuration information of the symbol in which the RE occupied by the first RS is located, and the NE2 may be configured according to the second configuration information. The pre-stored part of the first configuration information is determined to receive the time-frequency resource of the first RS; if the NE2 does not store the first configuration information, the NE1 may send the second configuration information including all the first configuration information to the NE2, that is, the first The second configuration information includes the subframe information of the first RS and the second RE indication information, where the second RE indication information includes the RE occupied by the first RS.
另一种可能的情况中,NE2可以预先存储一组导频图案的类型指示标识以及对应的导频图案,则NE1发送的第三配置信息可以包括第一RS的子帧和各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识,NE2可以根据各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识确定各个天线端口接收第一RS的时频资源。In another possible case, the NE2 may pre-store the type indication identifier of the set of pilot patterns and the corresponding pilot pattern, and the third configuration information sent by the NE1 may include the subframe corresponding to the first RS and the corresponding antenna port. The type of the pilot pattern indicates the identifier, and the NE2 may determine, according to the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port, that each antenna port receives the time-frequency resource of the first RS.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第十种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第十一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In conjunction with the first aspect, the optional implementation of any one of the first to the tenth aspects of the first aspect, in the eleventh optional embodiment of the first aspect, the method further includes:
所述NE1根据所述第一配置信息,确定向由所述第一小区服务的第一用户设备UE1发送下行数据时可用的时频资源。The NE1 determines, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the downlink data is sent to the first user equipment UE1 served by the first cell.
可选的,所述UE1发送下行数据时可用的时频资源可以不包含所述第一RS占用的RE与所述UE1的物理下行共享信道PDSCH占用的RE相同的RE。Optionally, the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 sends the downlink data may not include the RE that is occupied by the first RS and the RE that is occupied by the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) of the UE1.
采用这种方式,使得NE1可以指示UE1在接收数据时避开第一RS占用的时频资源,保证UE1接收数据的正确性。In this manner, the NE1 can be instructed to avoid the time-frequency resources occupied by the first RS when receiving the data, and ensure the correctness of the data received by the UE1.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第十一种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第十二种可选的实施方式中,所述NE1向UE1发送第三配置信息,所述第三配置信息用于指示所述UE1从所述NE1接收下行数据时可用的时频资源,所述UE1从所述NE1接收下行数据时可用的时频资源与所述第一配置信息指示的所述NE1发送所述第一RS使用的时频资源不重叠,所述第三配置信息包括所述第一配置信息的第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第三RE指示信息;With reference to the first aspect, the optional implementation of any one of the first to eleventh aspects of the first aspect, in the twelfth optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the NE1 sends the The third configuration information is used to indicate the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 receives the downlink data from the NE1, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 receives the downlink data from the NE1 The first time information of the first RS used by the first configuration information is not overlapped, and the third configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS of the first configuration information, and/or a third RE indication information;
其中,所述第三RE指示信息包括:所述第一RE指示信息,或者,The third RE indication information includes: the first RE indication information, or,
所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号与所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波与所述NE1的各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识三项中至少一项。a symbol in which the RE of the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is located, and a subcarrier where the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is located, and each antenna port of the NE1 The type of the corresponding pilot pattern indicates at least one of the three items.
需要说明的是,第三配置信息中可以包括第一RS的子帧信息和/或第三RE指示信息。It should be noted that the third configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS and/or third RE indication information.
一种可能的情况中,UE1可以预先存储部分第一RS的时频资源,如部分第一配置信息,则NE1发送的第三配置信息可以只包含缺少的第一配置信息,例如,UE1预先存储了第一RS的子帧和第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波,则NE1可以仅向UE1发送第一RS占用的RE所在的符号,UE1可以根据接收到的第三配置信息和预先存储的部分第一配置信息确定接收下行数据的可用的时频资源。In a possible case, the UE1 may pre-store part of the time-frequency resources of the first RS, such as part of the first configuration information, and the third configuration information sent by the NE1 may only include the first configuration information that is missing, for example, the UE1 pre-stores The subframe of the first RS and the subcarrier where the RE occupied by the first RS is located, the NE1 may send only the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS to the UE1, and the UE1 may be pre-stored according to the received third configuration information. Part of the first configuration information determines available time-frequency resources for receiving downlink data.
另一种可能的情况中,UE1可以预先存储导频图案的各种类型指示标识对应的导频图案,则NE1发送的第三配置信息可以包括第一RS的子帧和各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识,UE1可以根据各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识确定第一RS的时频资源。In another possible case, the UE1 may pre-store the pilot patterns corresponding to the identifiers of the various types of the pilot patterns, and the third configuration information sent by the NE1 may include the subframes of the first RS and the corresponding antenna ports. The type of the frequency pattern indicates the identifier, and the UE1 may determine the time-frequency resource of the first RS according to the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port.
还有一种可能的情况中,第三配置信息可以仅指示与UE1有关的第一RS的时频资源,例如,NE1能够获知UE1使用的子载波,则NE1发送的第三配置信息可以包括第一RS 的子帧和第一RS占用的RE所在的符号,UE1就可以确定第一RS占用的RE;又如,NE1可以通过广播消息或者UE专用信息向UE1发送第三配置信息,UE专用信息包含UE的标识,UE专用信息用于发送给选择的UE,广播消息中不包含UE的标识,广播消息中本身可以具有子帧号,则第三配置信息中可以不包含第一RS的子帧信息,即第三配置信息可以包含第三RE指示信息;而UE专用信息中可以带有选择的UE所分配的子载波,则第三配置信息中可以不包含第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波。In another possible case, the third configuration information may only indicate the time-frequency resource of the first RS related to the UE1, for example, the NE1 can learn the sub-carrier used by the UE1, and the third configuration information sent by the NE1 may include the first RS The UE may determine the RE occupied by the first RS, and the NE1 may send the third configuration information to the UE1 by using a broadcast message or UE-specific information, where the UE-specific information includes the UE. And the UE-specific information is used for sending to the selected UE, and the broadcast message does not include the identifier of the UE, and the broadcast message itself may have the subframe number, and the third configuration information may not include the subframe information of the first RS. That is, the third configuration information may include the third RE indication information; and the UE-specific information may include the sub-carriers allocated by the selected UE, and the third configuration information may not include the sub-carrier where the RE occupied by the first RS is located.
可选的,所述NE1通过广播消息和/或UE专用信息发送所述第三配置信息。可选的,所述NE1通过高层信令和/或物理层信令发送所述第三配置信息。可选的,所述高层信令包括无线资源控制RRC消息。可选的,所述RRC消息包括主系统信息块MIB消息,或者,系统信息块SIB消息。可选的,所述物理层信令包括数据控制指示信息DCI。可选的,所述第三配置信息包括所述第三RE指示信息,且所述第三RE指示的所述第一RS占用的RE与所述UE1的物理下行共享信道PDSCH的RE重叠;Optionally, the NE1 sends the third configuration information by using a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information. Optionally, the NE1 sends the third configuration information by using high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling. Optionally, the high layer signaling includes a radio resource control RRC message. Optionally, the RRC message includes a primary system information block MIB message, or a system information block SIB message. Optionally, the physical layer signaling includes data control indication information DCI. Optionally, the third configuration information includes the third RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE overlaps with the RE of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH of the UE1;
则所述NE1通过UE专用信息向所述UE1发送所述第三配置信息,所述第三配置信息包括第三RE指示信息,所述第三RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS与所述UE1的PDSCH冲突的RE为,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE与所述UE1的PDSCH的交集。The NE1 sends the third configuration information to the UE1 by using UE-specific information, where the third configuration information includes third RE indication information, the first RS indicated by the third RE indication information, and the The RE of the PDSCH of the UE1 is the intersection of the RE of the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information and the PDSCH of the UE1.
可选的,所述第三配置信息包括所述第一RS的子帧信息和所述第三RE指示信息,所述NE1通过广播消息向所述UE1发送所述第三配置信息中的所述第一RS的子帧信息;所述NE1通过UE专用信息向所述UE1发送所述第三配置信息中的所述第三RE指示信息。Optionally, the third configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS and the third RE indication information, where the NE1 sends the foregoing in the third configuration information to the UE1 by using a broadcast message. The subframe information of the first RS; the NE1 sends the third RE indication information in the third configuration information to the UE1 by using UE-specific information.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第十二种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第十三种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In conjunction with the first aspect, the optional implementation of any one of the first to the twelfth aspects, the method further includes:
所述NE1根据第五配置信息接收所述NE2发送的第二RS,所述第五配置信息包括所述NE2发送所述第二RS的时频资源。The NE1 receives the second RS sent by the NE2 according to the fifth configuration information, where the fifth configuration information includes the time-frequency resource that the NE2 sends the second RS.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第十三种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第十四种可选的实施方式中,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一RS的子帧信息,所述第五配置信息包括所述第二RS的子帧信息,With reference to the first aspect, the optional implementation of any one of the first to the thirteenth aspects of the first aspect, in the fourteenth optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the first configuration information includes The subframe information of the first RS, the fifth configuration information includes subframe information of the second RS,
所述NE1在所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧上发送所述第一RS,The NE1 sends the first RS on a subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS,
所述NE1在所述第二RS的子帧信息确定的子帧上接收所述第二RS。The NE1 receives the second RS on a subframe determined by subframe information of the second RS.
结合第一方面的第十三种至第十四种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第十五种可选的实施方式中,所述第一RS的子帧信息和所述第二RS的子帧信息确定的子帧的交集非空,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧的前段和后段分别包括上行时隙和下行时隙,或者,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧的前段和后段分别包括下行时隙和上行时隙;With reference to any one of the thirteenth to fourteenth alternative embodiments of the first aspect, in the fifteenth alternative implementation manner of the first aspect, the subframe information of the first RS and The intersection of the subframes determined by the subframe information of the second RS is not empty, and the front and the back segments of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS respectively include an uplink slot and a downlink slot, or The preceding and following segments of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS include a downlink slot and an uplink slot, respectively;
则所述NE1在所述第一RS的子帧信息指示的子帧的下行时隙上发送所述第一RS,所述NE1在所述第一RS的子帧信息指示的子帧的上行时隙上接收所述第二RS。The NE1 sends the first RS on a downlink time slot of the subframe indicated by the subframe information of the first RS, where the NE1 is in the uplink of the subframe indicated by the subframe information of the first RS. The second RS is received on the slot.
结合第一方面的第十三种至第十五种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第十六种可选的实施方式中,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一RS的子帧信息,所述第五配置信息包括所述第二RS的子帧信息,所述第一RS的子帧信息包括第一RS的子帧的周期和偏 置,所述第二RS的子帧信息包括第二RS的子帧的周期和偏置,所述第一RS的子帧的周期与第二RS的子帧的周期相同,所述第一RS的子帧的偏置与所述第二RS的子帧的偏置相隔一个周期;In conjunction with the optional implementation of any one of the thirteenth to fifteenth aspects of the first aspect, in the sixteenth optional implementation of the first aspect, the first configuration information includes the Sub-frame information of an RS, the fifth configuration information includes subframe information of the second RS, and the subframe information of the first RS includes a period and a partial of a subframe of the first RS The subframe information of the second RS includes a period and an offset of a subframe of the second RS, and a period of the subframe of the first RS is the same as a period of a subframe of the second RS, where the first RS is The offset of the subframe is separated from the offset of the subframe of the second RS by one cycle;
所述NE1周期性向所述NE2发送所述第一RS,所述NE1周期性的接收所述NE2发送的所述第二RS。其中,第一RS的子帧的周期和偏置的定义与SRS的子帧的周期和偏置的定义可以类似。可选的,偏置可以是子帧号。The NE1 periodically sends the first RS to the NE2, and the NE1 periodically receives the second RS sent by the NE2. The definition of the period and offset of the subframe of the first RS may be similar to the definition of the period and offset of the subframe of the SRS. Alternatively, the offset can be a subframe number.
结合第一方面的第十四种至第十六种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第十七种可选的实施方式中,所述NE1通过CELL1的各个天线端口接收所述NE2的CELL2的各个天线端口发送的所述第二RS,所述第二RS的子帧信息为所述NE2根据所述CELL2的小区标识确定的。In conjunction with the optional implementation of any one of the fourteenth to sixteenth aspects of the first aspect, in the seventeenth alternative implementation of the first aspect, the NE1 is received by each antenna port of the CELL1 The second RS sent by each antenna port of the CELL2 of the NE2, and the subframe information of the second RS is determined by the NE2 according to the cell identifier of the CELL2.
结合第一方面的第十四种至第十七种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第十八种可选的实施方式中,所述CELL2的小区标识为偶数,所述CELL1的小区标识为奇数,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧为第一子帧,所述第二RS的子帧信息确定的子帧为第二子帧,所述第二子帧为所述第一子帧之后间隔一个所述第一RS的子帧的周期的子帧;或者,With reference to any one of the fourteenth to seventeenth alternative embodiments of the first aspect, in the eighteenth optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the cell identifier of the CELL2 is an even number, The cell identifier of the CELL1 is an odd number, the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS is a first subframe, and the subframe determined by the subframe information of the second RS is a second subframe, and the second The subframe is a subframe of a period of one subframe of the first RS after the first subframe; or
所述CELL2的小区标识为奇数,所述CELL1的小区标识为偶数,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧为第一子帧,所述第二RS的子帧信息确定的子帧为第二子帧,所述第二子帧为所述第一子帧之后间隔一个所述第一RS的子帧的周期的子帧。The cell identifier of the CELL2 is an odd number, and the cell identifier of the CELL1 is an even number. The subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS is a first subframe, and the subframe determined by the subframe information of the second RS is a subframe. For the second subframe, the second subframe is a subframe of a period of one subframe of the first RS after the first subframe.
其中,第一子帧可以是预设的,例如,小区标识为奇数时预设第一子帧作为第一RS的子帧。The first subframe may be preset. For example, when the cell identifier is an odd number, the first subframe is preset as the subframe of the first RS.
结合第一方面,第一方面的第一种至第十八种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第十九种可选的实施方式中,所述NE1通过CELL1的各个天线端口向所述NE2的CELL2的各个天线端口发送所述第一RS,With reference to the first aspect, the optional embodiment of any one of the first to the eighteenth aspects of the first aspect, in the nineteenth alternative embodiment of the first aspect, wherein the NE1 passes through each of the CELL1 The antenna port sends the first RS to each antenna port of the CELL2 of the NE2,
所述第一RS的子帧信息为所述NE1根据所述CELL1的小区标识确定的。The subframe information of the first RS is determined by the NE1 according to the cell identifier of the CELL1.
结合第一方面,第一方面的第一种至第十九种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第十九种可选的实施方式中,所述CELL1和所述CELL2属于一个小区协作集。With reference to the first aspect, the optional embodiment of any one of the first to the nineteenth aspects of the first aspect, in the nineteenth alternative embodiment of the first aspect, the CELL1 and the CELL2 Belongs to a community collaboration set.
结合第一方面,第一方面的第一种至第二十种中任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第二十一种可选的实施方式中,所述NE1通过CELL1的天线端口向所述NE2的CELL2的天线端口发送所述第一RS,则在所述NE1根据第一配置信息向NE2发送第一RS之前,包括:With reference to the first aspect, any one of the first to the twentieth alternative embodiments of the first aspect, in the twenty-first alternative embodiment of the first aspect, the NE1 passes the CELL1 The antenna port sends the first RS to the antenna port of the CELL2 of the NE2, and before the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2 according to the first configuration information, the method includes:
所述NE1检测到所述CELL1与所述CELL2的上下行子帧配比不一致。The NE1 detects that the ratio of the uplink and downlink subframes of the CELL1 and the CELL2 is inconsistent.
本发明实施例的第二方面提供一种参考信号的传输方法,包括:A second aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for transmitting a reference signal, including:
第二小区CELL2归属的第二网络设备NE2根据第一配置信息接收第一小区CELL1归属的第一网络设备NE1发送的第一参考信号RS,所述第一配置信息包括用于指示所述NE1发送所述第一RS所使用的时频资源的信息。The second network device NE2 to which the second cell CELL2 belongs receives the first reference signal RS sent by the first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs according to the first configuration information, where the first configuration information includes Information of a time-frequency resource used by the first RS.
其中,可选的,所述NE2根据所述第一RS消除所述NE1对第一上行数据的干扰,所述第一上行数据来自所述NE2下的用户设备。Optionally, the NE2 cancels the interference of the NE1 on the first uplink data according to the first RS, where the first uplink data is from a user equipment under the NE2.
结合第二方面,第二方面的第一种任一种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第二种可选的实施方式中,所述NE2根据所述第一RS消除所述NE1对第一上行数据的干扰,包括: With reference to the second aspect, the first optional embodiment of the second aspect, in the second optional implementation of the second aspect, the NE2 cancels the NE1 pair according to the first RS The interference of the first uplink data includes:
所述NE2根据所述第一RS得到所述NE1与所述NE2之间的第一信道;The NE2 obtains a first channel between the NE1 and the NE2 according to the first RS;
所述NE2根据所述第一信道得到第一干扰信号;The NE2 obtains a first interference signal according to the first channel;
所述NE2根据所述第一干扰信号解调第一上行数据。The NE2 demodulates the first uplink data according to the first interference signal.
结合第二方面,第二方面的第一种至第二种任一种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第三种可选的实施方式中,在所述NE2根据所述第一信道得到第一干扰信号之前,包括:With reference to the second aspect, the first to the second optional embodiment of the second aspect, in the third optional implementation of the second aspect, the NE2 is configured according to the first channel Before the first interference signal is obtained, it includes:
所述NE2接收所述NE1发送的第一下行数据和/或第一下行数据的调度结果,所述第一下行数据为所述NE1发送给所述NE1下的用户设备的;The NE2 receives the scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data that is sent by the NE1, where the first downlink data is sent by the NE1 to the user equipment under the NE1;
则所述NE2根据所述第一信道得到第一干扰信号,包括:The NE2 obtains the first interference signal according to the first channel, and includes:
所述NE2根据所述第一下行数据和所述第一下行数据的调度结果中至少一项和所述第一信道还原所述第一干扰信号。The NE2 restores the first interference signal according to at least one of the first downlink data and the scheduling result of the first downlink data and the first channel.
结合第二方面,第二方面的第一种至第三种任一种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第四种可选的实施方式中,所述NE2通过所述NE2与所述NE1之间的X2接口接收所述第一下行数据和第一下行数据的调度结果。With reference to the second aspect, the first to third optional embodiments of the second aspect, in the fourth optional implementation of the second aspect, the NE2 passes the NE2 and the The X2 interface between the NEs receives the scheduling result of the first downlink data and the first downlink data.
结合第二方面,第二方面的第一种至第四种任一种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第五种可选的实施方式中,所述第一配置信息包括:With reference to the second aspect, the first to fourth optional embodiments of the second aspect, in the fifth optional implementation of the second aspect, the first configuration information includes:
所述第一RS的子帧信息,和,The subframe information of the first RS, and,
第一资源单元RE指示信息,所述第一RE指示信息用于指示所述第一RS占用的RE。The first resource unit RE indicates information, and the first RE indication information is used to indicate an RE occupied by the first RS.
第二方面的第一配置信息的含义与第一方面的第一配置信息的含义相同,此处不再赘述。The meaning of the first configuration information of the second aspect is the same as that of the first configuration information of the first aspect, and details are not described herein again.
结合第二方面,第二方面的第一种至第五种任一种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第六种可选的实施方式中,在所述NE2根据第一配置信息接收NE1发送的第一RS之前,包括:With reference to the second aspect, the first to fifth optional embodiments of the second aspect, in the sixth optional implementation of the second aspect, the receiving, by the NE2, according to the first configuration information Before the first RS sent by NE1, it includes:
所述NE2接收所述NE1发送的第二配置信息;所述第二配置信息包括所述第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第二RE指示信息;The NE2 receives the second configuration information sent by the NE1; the second configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS, and/or second RE indication information;
其中,所述第二RE指示信息包括:所述第一RS的RE位置,或者,所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号与所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波与所述CELL1发送所述第一RS使用的各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识三项中至少一项;The second RE indication information includes: an RE location of the first RS, or a symbol in which the RE occupied by the first RS is located and a subcarrier where the RE occupied by the first RS is located, and the CELL1 Sending, by the type of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port used by the first RS, at least one of the three items;
所述NE2根据所述第二配置信息确定所述第一配置信息。The NE2 determines the first configuration information according to the second configuration information.
第二方面的第二配置信息的含义与第一方面的第二配置信息的含义相同,此处不再赘述。The meaning of the second configuration information of the second aspect is the same as that of the second configuration information of the first aspect, and details are not described herein again.
结合第二方面,第二方面的第一种至第六种任一种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第七种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:With reference to the second aspect, the first to the sixth optional embodiment of the second aspect, in the seventh optional implementation of the second aspect, the method further includes:
所述NE2根据所述第一配置信息,确定分配给由所述CELL2服务的第二用户设备UE2发送上行数据时可用的时频资源。The NE2 determines, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the second user equipment UE2 served by the CELL2 sends uplink data.
可选的,所述UE2发送上行数据时可用的时频资源可以不包含所述第一RS占用的RE与所述UE2的物理上行共享信道PUSCH占用的RE相同的RE。Optionally, the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE2 sends the uplink data may not include the RE that is occupied by the first RS and the RE that is occupied by the PUSCH of the physical uplink shared channel of the UE2.
采用这种方式,使得NE2可以指示UE2在发送数据时避开第一RS占用的时频资源,保证UE2发送数据的正确性。In this manner, the NE2 can instruct the UE2 to avoid the time-frequency resources occupied by the first RS when transmitting data, and ensure the correctness of the data transmitted by the UE2.
结合第二方面,第二方面的第一种至第七种任一种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第 八种可选的实施方式中,所述传输方法还包括:With reference to the second aspect, the first to seventh optional embodiments of the second aspect, in the second aspect In an eight-optional implementation manner, the transmitting method further includes:
所述NE2向UE2发送第四配置信息,所述第四配置信息用于指示所述UE2向所述NE2发送上行数据时可用的时频资源,所述UE2向所述NE2发送上行数据时可用的时频资源与所述第一配置信息指示的所述NE1发送所述第一RS使用的时频资源不重叠。The NE2 sends the fourth configuration information to the UE2, where the fourth configuration information is used to indicate the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE2 sends the uplink data to the NE2, and is available when the UE2 sends the uplink data to the NE2. The time-frequency resource does not overlap with the time-frequency resource used by the NE1 that is sent by the first configuration information to send the first RS.
其中,所述第四配置信息可以包括所述第一配置信息中的第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第四RE指示信息;The fourth configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information, and/or fourth RE indication information;
其中,所述第四RE指示信息包括:所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE,或者,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号,或者,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波,或者,所述CELL1的各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识中至少一项。The fourth RE indication information includes: an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information, or an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information. And a symbol, or a subcarrier in which the RE of the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is located, or at least one of a type indication identifier of a pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port of the CELL1.
需要说明的是,第四配置信息中可以包括第一RS的子帧信息和/或第四RE指示信息。It should be noted that the fourth configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS and/or fourth RE indication information.
一种可能的情况中,UE2可以预先存储部分第一RS的时频资源,如部分第一配置信息,则NE2发送的第四配置信息可以只包含缺少的第一配置信息,例如,UE2预先存储了第一RS的子帧和第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波,则NE2可以仅向UE2发送第一RS占用的RE所在的符号,UE2可以根据接收到的第四配置信息和预先存储的部分第一配置信息确定接收下行数据的可用的时频资源。In a possible case, the UE2 may pre-store a part of the time-frequency resources of the first RS, such as a part of the first configuration information, and the fourth configuration information sent by the NE2 may only include the first configuration information that is missing, for example, the UE2 pre-stores The subframe of the first RS and the subcarrier where the RE occupied by the first RS is located, NE2 may send only the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS to the UE2, and the UE2 may be pre-stored according to the received fourth configuration information. Part of the first configuration information determines available time-frequency resources for receiving downlink data.
另一种可能的情况中,UE2可以预先存储导频图案的各种类型指示标识对应的导频图案,则NE2发送的第四配置信息可以包括第一RS的子帧和各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识,UE2可以根据各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识确定第一RS的时频资源。In another possible case, the UE2 may pre-store the pilot patterns corresponding to the identifiers of the various types of the pilot patterns, and the fourth configuration information sent by the NE2 may include the subframes of the first RS and the corresponding antenna ports. The type of the frequency pattern indicates the identifier, and the UE2 may determine the time-frequency resource of the first RS according to the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port.
还有一种可能的情况中,第四配置信息可以仅指示与UE2有关的第一RS的时频资源,例如,NE2能够获知UE2使用的子载波,则NE2发送的第四配置信息可以包括第一RS的子帧和第一RS占用的RE所在的符号,UE2就可以确定第一RS占用的RE;又如,NE2可以通过广播消息或者UE专用信息向UE2发送第四配置信息,UE专用信息包含UE的标识,UE专用信息用于发送给选择的UE,广播消息中不包含UE的标识,广播消息中本身可以具有子帧号,则第四配置信息中可以不包含第一RS的子帧信息,即第四配置信息可以包含第三RE指示信息;而UE专用信息中可以带有选择的UE所分配的子载波,则第四配置信息中可以不包含第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波。In another possible case, the fourth configuration information may only indicate the time-frequency resource of the first RS related to the UE2, for example, the NE2 can learn the sub-carrier used by the UE2, and the fourth configuration information sent by the NE2 may include the first The subframe of the RS and the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS, the UE2 may determine the RE occupied by the first RS; for example, the NE2 may send the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using a broadcast message or UE-specific information, where the UE-specific information includes The identifier of the UE, the UE-specific information is used for sending to the selected UE, and the broadcast message does not include the identifier of the UE. The broadcast message itself may have a subframe number, and the fourth configuration information may not include the subframe information of the first RS. The fourth configuration information may include the third RE indication information, and the UE-specific information may include the sub-carrier allocated by the selected UE, and the fourth configuration information may not include the sub-carrier where the RE occupied by the first RS is located. .
可选的,所述NE2通过广播消息和/或UE专用信息发送所述第三配置信息。可选的,所述NE2通过高层信令和/或物理层信令发送所述第三配置信息。可选的,所述高层信令包括无线资源控制RRC消息。可选的,所述RRC消息包括主系统信息块MIB消息,或者,系统信息块SIB消息。可选的,所述物理层信令包括数据控制指示信息DCI。Optionally, the NE2 sends the third configuration information by using a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information. Optionally, the NE2 sends the third configuration information by using high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling. Optionally, the high layer signaling includes a radio resource control RRC message. Optionally, the RRC message includes a primary system information block MIB message, or a system information block SIB message. Optionally, the physical layer signaling includes data control indication information DCI.
可选的,所述第一配置信息包括第一RE指示信息,且所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE与所述UE2的物理上行共享信道PUSCH的RE重叠;Optionally, the first configuration information includes the first RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information overlaps with the RE of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH of the UE2;
则所述NE2通过UE专用信息向所述UE2发送所述第四配置信息,所述第四配置信息包括第四RE指示信息,所述第四RE指示信息指示的与所述第一RS占用的RE冲突的PUSCH的RE位置为,所述第一RE指示信息指示的RE位置与所述UE2的PUSCH的交集。And the NE2 sends the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using the UE-specific information, where the fourth configuration information includes a fourth RE indication information, where the fourth RE indication information is occupied by the first RS The RE location of the PUSCH in which the RE conflicts is the intersection of the RE location indicated by the first RE indication information and the PUSCH of the UE2.
可选的,所述第四配置信息包括所述第一RS的子帧和所述第四RE指示信息,所述 NE2通过广播消息向所述UE2发送所述第四配置信息中的所述第一RS的子帧信息;所述NE2通过UE专用信息向所述UE2发送所述第四配置信息中的所述第四RE指示信息。Optionally, the fourth configuration information includes a subframe of the first RS and the fourth RE indication information, where The NE2 sends the subframe information of the first RS in the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using a broadcast message; the NE2 sends the first part of the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using UE-specific information. Four RE indication information.
本发明实施例的第三方面提供一种参考信号的传输方法,包括:A third aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for transmitting a reference signal, including:
第一用户设备UE1确定接收数据或者发送数据时可用的时频资源。The first user equipment UE1 determines a time-frequency resource available when receiving data or transmitting data.
其中,所述接收数据或者发送数据时可用的时频资源可以与所述第一RS使用的时频资源不重叠。所述第一RS为第一小区CELL1归属的第一网络设备NE1向第二小区CELL2归属的第二网络设备NE2发送的。The time-frequency resource that is available when the data is received or transmitted may not overlap with the time-frequency resource used by the first RS. The first RS is sent by the first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs to the second network device NE2 to which the second cell CELL2 belongs.
用户设备可以根据各种第三配置信息确定与自身发送数据或者接收数据时的可用的时频资源,具体的,用户设备可以避开第一RS使用的时频资源进行发送数据或者接收数据。采用本方面提供的方法可以在发送第一RS的同时保证用户设备发送数据或者接收数据的正确性。The user equipment can determine the available time-frequency resources when the data is transmitted or received by the user according to the third configuration information. Specifically, the user equipment can use the time-frequency resource used by the first RS to transmit data or receive data. The method provided by the present aspect can ensure the correctness of the user equipment to send data or receive data while transmitting the first RS.
可选的,所述第三配置信息用于指示第一参考信号RS占用的全部或者部分时频资源,所述第一RS为第一小区CELL1归属的第一网络设备NE1向第二小区CELL2归属的第二网络设备NE2发送的,所述UE1的服务小区为CELL1或者CELL2。Optionally, the third configuration information is used to indicate all or part of the time-frequency resources occupied by the first reference signal RS, where the first RS is the first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs to belong to the second cell CELL2. The serving cell of the UE1 is sent by the second network device NE2, and the serving cell of the UE1 is CELL1 or CELL2.
结合第三方面,第三方面的第一种任一种可选的实施方式,在第三方面的第二种可选的实施方式中,在所述UE1根据第三配置信息确定接收数据或者发送数据时可用的时频资源之前,包括:With reference to the third aspect, any one of the optional embodiments of the third aspect, in the second optional implementation manner of the third aspect, the determining, by the UE1, the received data or the sending according to the third configuration information Before the time-frequency resources available for data, include:
所述UE1从所述NE1或者所述NE2接收所述第三配置信息。The UE1 receives the third configuration information from the NE1 or the NE2.
其中,所述第三配置信息包括所述第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第三RE指示信息,The third configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS, and/or third RE indication information,
所述第三RE指示信息包括:所述第一RS占用的RE位置,或者,The third RE indication information includes: an RE location occupied by the first RS, or
所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号与所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波与所述第一RS占用的RE对应的导频图案的类型指示标识三项中至少一项。The symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS is at least one of three types of the pilot pattern of the pilot pattern in which the RE of the first RS is located and the type of the pilot pattern corresponding to the RE occupied by the first RS.
第三方面的第三配置信息的含义与第一方面的第三配置信息的含义相同,此处不再赘述。The meaning of the third configuration information of the third aspect is the same as that of the third configuration information of the first aspect, and details are not described herein again.
可选的,所述UE1接收广播消息和/或UE专用信息,所述广播消息和/或UE专用信息包含所述第三配置信息。可选的,所述UE1接收高层信令和/或物理层信令,所述高层信令和/或物理层信令包含所述第三配置信息。可选的,所述高层信令包括无线资源控制RRC消息。可选的,所述RRC消息包括主系统信息块MIB消息,或者,系统信息块SIB消息。可选的,所述物理层信令包括数据控制指示信息DCI。Optionally, the UE1 receives a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information, where the broadcast message and/or UE-specific information includes the third configuration information. Optionally, the UE1 receives high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling, where the high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling includes the third configuration information. Optionally, the high layer signaling includes a radio resource control RRC message. Optionally, the RRC message includes a primary system information block MIB message, or a system information block SIB message. Optionally, the physical layer signaling includes data control indication information DCI.
结合第三方面,第三方面的第一种至第二种任一种可选的实施方式,在第三方面的第三种可选的实施方式中,所述UE1的服务小区为CELL1,所述第三配置信息为所述NE1发送的,则所述UE1根据第三配置信息确定接收数据或者发送数据时可用的时频资源,包括:With reference to the third aspect, the first to the second optional embodiment of the third aspect, in the third optional implementation manner of the third aspect, the serving cell of the UE1 is CELL1, The third configuration information is sent by the NE1, and the UE1 determines, according to the third configuration information, time-frequency resources that are available when receiving data or transmitting data, including:
所述UE1根据所述第三配置信息确定接收数据时可用的时频资源。The UE1 determines, according to the third configuration information, a time-frequency resource available when receiving data.
结合第三方面,第三方面的第一种至第三种任一种可选的实施方式,在第三方面的第四种可选的实施方式中,所述第三配置信息包括所述第三RE指示信息,且所述第三RE指示的所述第一RS占用的RE与所述UE1的物理下行共享信道PDSCH的RE重叠,With reference to the third aspect, the first to third optional embodiments of the third aspect, in the fourth optional implementation of the third aspect, the third configuration information includes the The third RE indicates the information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE overlaps with the RE of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH of the UE1,
则所述UE1通过所述NE1发送的UE专用信息接收第三配置信息;所述UE1确定的所述接收数据时可用的时频资源为,所述UE1的PDSCH中与所述第一RS占用的RE不 重叠的RE。The UE1 receives the third configuration information by using the UE-specific information sent by the NE1, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 determines the received data is that the PDSCH of the UE1 is occupied by the first RS. RE not Overlapping REs.
结合第三方面,第三方面的第一种至第二种任一种可选的实施方式,在第三方面的第五种可选的实施方式中,所述UE1的服务小区为CELL2,所述第三配置信息为所述NE2发送的,则所述UE1根据第三配置信息确定接收数据或者发送数据时可用的时频资源,包括:With reference to the third aspect, the first to the second optional embodiment of the third aspect, in the fifth optional implementation manner of the third aspect, the serving cell of the UE1 is CELL2, The third configuration information is sent by the NE2, and the UE1 determines, according to the third configuration information, time-frequency resources that are available when receiving data or transmitting data, including:
所述UE1根据所述第三配置信息确定发送数据时可用的时频资源。The UE1 determines, according to the third configuration information, a time-frequency resource available when data is transmitted.
结合第三方面,第三方面的第一种、第二种、第五种任一种可选的实施方式,在第三方面的第六种可选的实施方式中,所述第三配置信息包括第三RE指示信息,且所述第三RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE与所述UE1的物理上行共享信道PUSCH的RE重叠;With reference to the third aspect, the first, second, and fifth optional embodiments of the third aspect, in the sixth optional implementation manner of the third aspect, the third configuration information The third RE indication information is included, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE indication information overlaps with the RE of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH of the UE1;
则所述UE1通过所述NE2发送的UE专用信息接收所述第三配置信息;所述UE1确定的所述发送数据时可用的时频资源为,所述UE1的PUSCH中与所述第一RS占用的RE不重叠的RE。And the UE1 receives the third configuration information by using the UE-specific information that is sent by the NE2, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 determines the data to be sent, is the PUSCH of the UE1 and the first RS. The REs that occupy the RE do not overlap.
第四方面,本发明实施例提供了一种参考信号的传输装置,该装置可以为网络设备,该网络设备具有实现上述方法实际中第一网络设备行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a transmission device for a reference signal, where the device may be a network device, and the network device has a function of implementing behavior of the first network device in the foregoing method. The functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
第五方面,本发明实施例提供了一种参考信号的传输装置,该装置可以为网络设备,该网络设备具有实现上述方法实际中第二网络设备行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a transmission device for a reference signal, where the device may be a network device, and the network device has a function of implementing the behavior of the second network device in the actual method. The functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
第六方面,本发明实施例提供了一种参考信号的传输装置,该装置可以为用户设备,该用户设备具有实现上述方法实际中用户设备行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a transmission device for a reference signal, where the device may be a user equipment, and the user equipment has a function of realizing the behavior of the user equipment in the actual method. The functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
第七方面,本发明实施例提供了一种网络设备,该网络设备具有实现上述方法实际中第一网络设备行为的功能。网络设备的结构中包括无线通信接口,例如可以是发射器和接收器,以及网络通信接口。所述无线通信接口用于支持网络设备与网络设备和用户设备之间的通信,所述发射器用于向网络设备和用户设备发送上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据,所述接收器用于支持网络设备接收上述方法中所涉及的网络设备和用户设备发送的信息或者数据,所述网络通信接口用于支持网络设备与网络设备之间的通信。在一个可能的实现方式中,网络设备的结构中还可以包括解调器和/或译码器。所述解调器用于对上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据进行解调或者解扩频和解调;所述译码器用于对上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据进行译码或者进行解扰和译码。在一个可能的实现方式中,网络设备的结构中还可以包括处理器。所述处理器被配置为支持网络设备执行上述方法中相应的功能。可以理解的是,当所述网络设备的结构中不包括所述解调器和/或译码器时,所述解调器和/或译码器的功能也可以在所述接收器或者所述处理器中完成。所述网络设备还可以包括存储器,所述存储器用于与处理器耦合,保存网络设备必要的程序指令和数据。所述网络设备还可以包括接口单元,用于支持与其他网络设备之间的通信,如与核心网节 点之间的通信。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a network device, where the network device has a function of implementing behavior of a first network device in the foregoing method. The structure of the network device includes a wireless communication interface, such as a transmitter and a receiver, and a network communication interface. The wireless communication interface is configured to support communication between the network device and the network device and the user equipment, and the transmitter is configured to send information or data involved in the foregoing method to the network device and the user equipment, where the receiver is used to support the network. The device receives information or data sent by the network device and the user equipment involved in the foregoing method, and the network communication interface is used to support communication between the network device and the network device. In a possible implementation, a demodulator and/or a decoder may also be included in the structure of the network device. The demodulator is configured to demodulate or despread and demodulate information or data involved in the above method; the decoder is configured to decode or descramble information or data involved in the above method And decoding. In a possible implementation manner, a processor may also be included in the structure of the network device. The processor is configured to support a network device to perform a corresponding function of the above methods. It can be understood that when the demodulator and/or decoder are not included in the structure of the network device, the functions of the demodulator and/or decoder may also be at the receiver or the Completed in the processor. The network device can also include a memory for coupling with the processor to store program instructions and data necessary for the network device. The network device may further include an interface unit for supporting communication with other network devices, such as a core network segment. Communication between points.
第八方面,本发明实施例提供了一种网络设备,该网络设备具有实现上述方法实际中第二网络设备行为的功能。网络设备的结构中包括无线通信接口,例如可以是发射器和接收器,以及网络通信接口。所述无线通信接口用于支持网络设备与网络设备和用户设备之间的通信,所述发射器用于向网络设备和用户设备发送上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据,所述接收器用于支持网络设备接收上述方法中所涉及的网络设备和用户设备发送的信息或者数据,所述网络通信接口用于支持网络设备与网络设备之间的通信。在一个可能的实现方式中,网络设备的结构中还可以包括解调器和/或译码器。所述解调器用于对上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据进行解调或者解扩频和解调;所述译码器用于对上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据进行译码或者进行解扰和译码。在一个可能的实现方式中,网络设备的结构中还可以包括处理器。所述处理器被配置为支持网络设备执行上述方法中相应的功能。可以理解的是,当所述网络设备的结构中不包括所述解调器和/或译码器时,所述解调器和/或译码器的功能也可以在所述接收器或者所述处理器中完成。所述网络设备还可以包括存储器,所述存储器用于与处理器耦合,保存网络设备必要的程序指令和数据。所述网络设备还可以包括接口单元,用于支持与其他网络设备之间的通信,如与核心网节点之间的通信。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a network device, where the network device has a function of implementing behavior of a second network device in the foregoing method. The structure of the network device includes a wireless communication interface, such as a transmitter and a receiver, and a network communication interface. The wireless communication interface is configured to support communication between the network device and the network device and the user equipment, and the transmitter is configured to send information or data involved in the foregoing method to the network device and the user equipment, where the receiver is used to support the network. The device receives information or data sent by the network device and the user equipment involved in the foregoing method, and the network communication interface is used to support communication between the network device and the network device. In a possible implementation, a demodulator and/or a decoder may also be included in the structure of the network device. The demodulator is configured to demodulate or despread and demodulate information or data involved in the above method; the decoder is configured to decode or descramble information or data involved in the above method And decoding. In a possible implementation manner, a processor may also be included in the structure of the network device. The processor is configured to support a network device to perform a corresponding function of the above methods. It can be understood that when the demodulator and/or decoder are not included in the structure of the network device, the functions of the demodulator and/or decoder may also be at the receiver or the Completed in the processor. The network device can also include a memory for coupling with the processor to store program instructions and data necessary for the network device. The network device may also include an interface unit for supporting communication with other network devices, such as communication with a core network node.
第九方面,本发明实施例提供了一种用户设备,用户设备的结构中包括收发器,例如可以是接收器和发射器。所述发射器用于支持用户设备向网络设备发送上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据,所述接收器用于支持用户设备接收上述方法中所涉及的网络设备发送的信息或者数据。在一个可能的实现方式中,用户设备的结构中还可以包括编码器和/或调制器。所述编码器用于对上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据进行编码或者进行编码和加扰;所述调制器用于对上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据进行调制或者进行调制和扩频。在一个可能的实现方式中,用户设备还可以包括处理器。所述处理器被配置为支持用户设备执行上述方法中相应的功能。可以理解的是,当所述用户设备的结构中不包括所述调制器和/或编码器时,所述调制器和/或编码器的功能也可以在所述发射器或者所述处理器中完成。所述用户设备还可以包括存储器,所述存储器用于与处理器耦合,保存用户设备必要的程序指令和数据。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a user equipment, where the structure of the user equipment includes a transceiver, such as a receiver and a transmitter. The transmitter is configured to support the user equipment to send information or data involved in the foregoing method to the network device, and the receiver is configured to support the user equipment to receive information or data sent by the network device involved in the foregoing method. In a possible implementation, an encoder and/or a modulator may also be included in the structure of the user equipment. The encoder is used to encode or encode and scramble the information or data involved in the above method; the modulator is used to modulate or modulate and spread the information or data involved in the above method. In a possible implementation, the user equipment may further include a processor. The processor is configured to support a user device to perform a corresponding function in the above method. It can be understood that when the modulator and/or the encoder are not included in the structure of the user equipment, the functions of the modulator and/or the encoder may also be in the transmitter or the processor. carry out. The user equipment may also include a memory for coupling with the processor to store program instructions and data necessary for the user equipment.
第十方面,本发明实施例提供了一种通信系统,该系统包括上述方面所述的网络设备和用户设备。According to a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication system, where the system includes the network device and the user equipment in the foregoing aspect.
第十一方面,本发明实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,用于储存为上述网络设备所用的计算机软件指令,其包含用于执行上述方面所设计的程序。In an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a computer storage medium for storing computer software instructions for use in the network device, including a program designed to perform the above aspects.
第十二方面,本发明实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,用于储存为上述用户设备所用的计算机软件指令,其包含用于执行上述方面所设计的程序。In a twelfth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a computer storage medium for storing computer software instructions for use by the user equipment, including a program designed to perform the above aspects.
本发明实施例提供的参考信号的传输方法通过第一小区归属的第一网络设备向第二小区归属的第二网络设备发送第一参考信息,使得第二网络设备可以根据所述第一参考信号消除第一网络设备对第二网络设备下用户设备的上行数据的干扰。The method for transmitting the reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present invention sends the first reference information to the second network device to which the second cell belongs, by using the first network device to which the first cell belongs, so that the second network device can be based on the first reference signal. The interference of the first network device on the uplink data of the user equipment under the second network device is eliminated.
附图说明 DRAWINGS
图1为本发明实施例提供的参考信号的传输方法实施例一的流程示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart diagram of Embodiment 1 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图2为图1所示方法中S102NE2根据第一RS消除NE1对第一上行数据的干扰的一种可选的实施方式的交互过程的流程示意图;2 is a schematic flowchart of an interaction process of an optional implementation manner in which the S102NE2 cancels the interference of the first uplink data by the first RS according to the first RS in the method shown in FIG.
图3为图1所示方法中NE2获取第一配置信息的一种可选的实施方式的流程图;3 is a flowchart of an optional implementation manner of acquiring first configuration information by NE2 in the method shown in FIG. 1;
图4为本发明实施例提供的参考信号的传输方法实施例二的第一种可选的实施方式的流程示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a first optional implementation manner of Embodiment 2 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图5为本发明实施例提供的参考信号的传输方法实施例二的第二种可选的实施方式的流程示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a second optional implementation manner of Embodiment 2 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图6为本发明实施例提供的参考信号的传输方法实施例三的第一种可选的实施方式的流程示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a first optional implementation manner of Embodiment 3 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图7为本发明实施例提供的参考信号的传输方法实施例三的第二种可选的实施方式的流程示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a second optional implementation manner of Embodiment 3 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图8为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第一种可选的实施方式的示意图;8 is a schematic diagram of a first alternative embodiment of first RE indication information of first configuration information;
图9为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第二种可选的实施方式的示意图;9 is a schematic diagram of a second optional implementation manner of first RE indication information of the first configuration information;
图10为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第三种可选的实施方式的示意图;10 is a schematic diagram of a third alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information;
图11为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第四种可选的实施方式的示意图;11 is a schematic diagram of a fourth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information;
图12为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第五种可选的实施方式的第一部分示意图;12 is a first partial schematic diagram of a fifth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information;
图13为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第五种可选的实施方式的第二部分示意图;13 is a schematic diagram of a second part of a fifth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information;
图14为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第六种可选的实施方式的示意图;14 is a schematic diagram of a sixth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information;
图15为第一配置信息的一种可选的实施方式的场景示意图;15 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of an optional implementation manner of the first configuration information;
图16为第一配置信息的又一种可选的实施方式的场景示意图;16 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of still another optional implementation manner of the first configuration information;
图17为本发明实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图;FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图18为本发明实施例提供的又一种网络设备的结构示意图;FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of still another network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图19为本发明实施例提供的一种用户设备的结构示意图;FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图20为本发明实施例提供的一种网络设备的可选的结构示意图;FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of an optional network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图21为本发明实施例提供的又一种网络设备的可选的结构示意图;FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of another network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图22为本发明实施例提供的一种用户设备的可选的结构示意图。FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of an optional user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
具体实施方式detailed description
在通信系统中,随着各种通信技术对频谱资源利用率的提升,带来的干扰问题也越来越显著。例如,在LTE系统中,相邻的小区配置的频段相同时,一个小区的下行频段与另一个小区的上行频段可能会出现重叠,导致第一个小区的下行信号对第二个小区的上行信号产生干扰。又如,对于TDD模式的小区,虽然可以通过子帧配比使得上下行数据通道通过不同的时隙分开,但是,当相邻小区的小区上下行子帧配比与本小区不同时,本小区的下行时隙上传输的信号对相邻小区的上行时隙上传输的信号仍然会有干扰。再如,比普通TDD技术更进一步的动态TDD技术可以根据网络的小区上下行业务负载情况灵活、快速地切换小区的时隙配置,通过匹配小区的具体业务需求来提高小区上下行业务的吞吐 量。然而,引入动态TDD技术同时也必然引入不同小区间上下行干扰。这使得小区间的相互干扰(Inter-cell Interference)问题更加严重,只有有效解决这一问题,才能充分发挥动态TDD技术灵活、高效的性能优势。In the communication system, as various communication technologies increase the utilization of spectrum resources, the interference problem is also becoming more and more significant. For example, in an LTE system, when the frequency bands configured by the adjacent cells are the same, the downlink frequency band of one cell may overlap with the uplink frequency band of another cell, and the uplink signal of the first cell is uplinked to the uplink signal of the second cell. Interference. For example, for a cell in the TDD mode, although the uplink and downlink data channels can be separated by different time slots by using a subframe ratio, when the uplink and downlink subframe ratios of the cells of the neighboring cell are different from the local cell, the cell The signal transmitted on the downlink time slot still interferes with the signal transmitted on the uplink time slot of the neighboring cell. For example, a dynamic TDD technology that is more advanced than the conventional TDD technology can flexibly and quickly switch the time slot configuration of the cell according to the uplink and downlink traffic load conditions of the network, and improve the throughput of the uplink and downlink services of the cell by matching the specific service requirements of the cell. the amount. However, the introduction of dynamic TDD technology also inevitably introduces uplink and downlink interference between different cells. This makes the inter-cell interference problem between cells more serious. Only by effectively solving this problem can the dynamic and efficient performance advantages of dynamic TDD technology be fully utilized.
针对于上述各种组网配置下的干扰场景,本发明实施例提供一种参考信号的传输方法,用以消除干扰,进而提高接收数据的正确性。For the interference scenario in the above various networking configurations, the embodiment of the present invention provides a method for transmitting a reference signal, which is used to eliminate interference, thereby improving the correctness of the received data.
图1为本发明实施例提供的参考信号的传输方法实施例一的流程示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart diagram of Embodiment 1 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
本发明实施例的执行主体可以包括:第一网络设备NE1,第二网络设备NE2。在本发明实施例中,网络设备包括与用户设备之间进行通信的无线接口,使得用户设备通过所述网络设备进行无线通信。网络设备可以是GSM系统或CDMA系统中的基站(Base Transceiver Station,BTS),也可以是WCDMA系统中的基站(NodeB,NB),还可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),或者是云无线接入网络(Cloud Radio Access Network,CRAN)中的无线控制器,或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备、未来5G网络中的网络侧设备或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)中的网络设备等。The executor of the embodiment of the present invention may include: a first network device NE1, and a second network device NE2. In the embodiment of the present invention, the network device includes a wireless interface that communicates with the user equipment, so that the user equipment performs wireless communication through the network device. The network device may be a base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in a GSM system or a CDMA system, or may be a base station (NodeB, NB) in a WCDMA system, or may be an evolved base station (eNB) in an LTE system. Or eNodeB), or a wireless controller in a Cloud Radio Access Network (CRAN), or the network device can be a relay station, an access point, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, or a network in a future 5G network. A side device or a network device in a publicly available Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) in the future.
如图1所示,本发明实施例的方法可以包括:As shown in FIG. 1, the method of the embodiment of the present invention may include:
S101:NE1根据第一配置信息向NE2发送第一参考信号RS。S101: The NE1 sends the first reference signal RS to the NE2 according to the first configuration information.
在本发明的各个实施例中,NE1和NE2可以是基站类型同构网络也可以是异构网络中的网络设备,例如,NE1和NE2可以都是微基站,也可以都是宏基站,也可以分别为微基站和宏基站。可选的,NE1与NE2可以为同一基站或不同基站。In various embodiments of the present invention, NE1 and NE2 may be base station type homogeneous networks or network devices in a heterogeneous network. For example, NE1 and NE2 may both be micro base stations or macro base stations. They are a micro base station and a macro base station, respectively. Optionally, NE1 and NE2 may be the same base station or different base stations.
第一配置信息包括用于指示NE1向NE2发送第一RS所使用的时频资源的信息。其中,时频资源可以包括时域资源、频域资源、空间域资源中至少一种。例如,若NE1和NE2为LTE的基站,则第一配置信息指示的时频资源可以是第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,用于指示第一RS占用的RE的第一RE指示信息。可选的,所述第一配置信息还可以包括扰码,扰码可以用于NE1对第一RS进行加扰后发送。可选的,扰码可以为NE1的标识。The first configuration information includes information used to indicate that the NE1 sends the time-frequency resource used by the first RS to the NE2. The time-frequency resource may include at least one of a time domain resource, a frequency domain resource, and a spatial domain resource. For example, if NE1 and NE2 are LTE base stations, the time-frequency resource indicated by the first configuration information may be the subframe information of the first RS, and/or the first RE indication information indicating the RE occupied by the first RS. . Optionally, the first configuration information may further include a scrambling code, where the scrambling code may be used by the NE1 to perform scrambling on the first RS. Optionally, the scrambling code can be an identifier of NE1.
可选的,NE1可以通过第一小区CELL1的天线端口向NE2的第二小区CELL2的天线端口发送第一RS。Optionally, NE1 may send the first RS to an antenna port of the second cell CELL2 of NE2 through an antenna port of the first cell CELL1.
需要说明的是,NE1的CELL1和NE2的CELL2可以属于同一个协作集,在一个协作集内的各个网络设备的子帧同步。例如,可以定时对齐子帧,使得各个网络设备的中具有相同子帧号的子帧的起始位置一样。It should be noted that CELL1 of NE1 and CELL2 of NE2 may belong to the same collaboration set, and subframes of each network device in one collaboration set are synchronized. For example, the subframes may be aligned periodically such that the start positions of the subframes having the same subframe number in each network device are the same.
需要说明的是,NE1可以通过NE1的天线向NE2发送第一RS,NE2通过NE2的天线设备接收第一RS。也就是说,第一RS经历了NE1与NE2之间的第一信道。由于TDD系统信道具有信道互易性,因此可以根据N1向NE2发送的信道估计NE2向NE1发送的信道,因此,根据第一RS可以估计NE1与NE2之间的第一信道。It should be noted that NE1 can send the first RS to NE2 through the antenna of NE1, and NE2 receives the first RS through the antenna device of NE2. That is, the first RS experiences the first channel between NE1 and NE2. Since the TDD system channel has channel reciprocity, the channel transmitted by NE2 to NE1 can be estimated according to the channel transmitted by N1 to NE2. Therefore, the first channel between NE1 and NE2 can be estimated according to the first RS.
可选的,NE1可以通过第一小区CELL1的天线端口向所述NE2的第二小区CELL2的天线端口发送所述第一RS,则NE2使用第一RS消除的干扰就是CELL1的下行信道对CELL2的上行信道产生的干扰。Optionally, NE1 may send the first RS to an antenna port of the second cell CELL2 of the NE2 by using an antenna port of the first cell CELL1, and the interference eliminated by the first RS by the NE2 is a downlink channel pair CELL2 of the CELL1. Interference generated by the upstream channel.
S102:NE2根据第一RS消除NE1对第一上行数据的干扰。S102: The NE2 cancels the interference of the NE1 on the first uplink data according to the first RS.
其中,第一上行数据来自NE2下的用户设备。 The first uplink data is from the user equipment under the NE2.
需要说明的是,在本发明实施例中,用户设备可以是各种类型的终端设备,该终端设备可以是移动的或固定的。该终端设备可以指接入终端、用户设备(User Equipment,UE)、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。接入终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的PLMN中的终端设备等。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present invention, the user equipment may be various types of terminal equipment, and the terminal equipment may be mobile or fixed. The terminal device may refer to an access terminal, a user equipment (User Equipment, UE), a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a terminal, a wireless communication device, and a user agent. Or user device. The access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), with wireless communication. Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in future 5G networks, or terminal devices in future evolved PLMNs, and the like.
图2为图1所示方法中S102NE2根据第一RS消除NE1对第一上行数据的干扰的一种可选的实施方式的交互过程的流程示意图。2 is a schematic flowchart of an interaction process of an optional implementation manner in which the S102NE2 cancels the interference of the first uplink data by the first RS according to the first RS in the method shown in FIG.
如参考图2,在图1所示的传输方法的基础上,本发明实施例中提供的传输方法中S102可以包括S201-S203。As shown in FIG. 2, on the basis of the transmission method shown in FIG. 1, S102 in the transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present invention may include S201-S203.
S201:NE2根据第一RS还原NE1与NE2之间的第一信道。S201: NE2 restores the first channel between NE1 and NE2 according to the first RS.
S202:NE2根据第一下行数据和第一下行数据的调度结果中至少一项和第一信道得到第一干扰信号。S202: The NE2 obtains the first interference signal according to at least one of the first downlink data and the scheduling result of the first downlink data, and the first channel.
其中,第一下行数据和/或第一下行数据的调度结果可以由NE1在S202之前发送给NE2,也可以是预先定义的下行数据和下行数据的调度结果。第一干扰信号包含NE1的下行数据对第一上行数据的干扰信号。The scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data may be sent by NE1 to NE2 before S202, or may be a scheduling result of predefined downlink data and downlink data. The first interference signal includes an interference signal of the downlink data of the NE1 to the first uplink data.
S203:NE2根据第一干扰信号解调第一上行数据。S203: The NE2 demodulates the first uplink data according to the first interference signal.
其中,NE2解调第一上行数据时,可以利用第一干扰信号将接收到的第一上行数据的信号流中的干扰信号去除,进而提高NE2对第一上行数据解调的正确性。When the NE2 demodulates the first uplink data, the first interference signal may be used to remove the interference signal in the received signal stream of the first uplink data, thereby improving the correctness of the NE2 to demodulate the first uplink data.
可选的,在S202之前可以包括:Optionally, before S202, the method may include:
S204:NE1向NE2发送第一下行数据和/或第一下行数据的调度结果。S204: NE1 sends a scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data to NE2.
其中,所述第一下行数据为所述NE1发送给所述NE1下的用户设备的,NE1可以通过X2接口或者网管接口等有线数据通道向NE2发送第一下行数据和/或第一下行数据的调度结果,可选的,NE1也可以通过无线数据通道发送第一下行数据和/或第一下行数据的调度结果。可选的,NE1与NE2可以为同一网络设备,则NE2可以通过内部模块之间的数据通道获取第一下行数据和第一下行数据的调度结果,在这种情况下,本领域技术人员应当明了S201不是必须执行的步骤。The first downlink data is sent by the NE1 to the user equipment of the NE1, and the NE1 may send the first downlink data and/or the first downlink to the NE2 through a wired data channel such as an X2 interface or a network management interface. The scheduling result of the row data, optionally, the NE1 may also send the scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data through the wireless data channel. Optionally, NE1 and NE2 may be the same network device, and the NE2 may obtain the scheduling result of the first downlink data and the first downlink data by using a data channel between the internal modules. In this case, those skilled in the art. It should be clear that S201 is not a step that must be performed.
需要说明的是,S201至S203为NE2消除NE1对第一上行数据的干扰的一种可选的方式,其他可选的方式见下文中叙述。It should be noted that S201 to S203 are an alternative manner in which NE2 cancels the interference of NE1 on the first uplink data, and other optional manners are described below.
还需要说明的是,针对于TDD模式的小区,若两个相邻或同覆盖小区的频率范围相同但小区上下行子帧配比不同,例如CELL1的下行时隙恰好为CELL2的上行时隙,则CELL1的下行时隙上有下行数据时会对CELL2的上行时隙上的信号产生干扰。如果限制相邻小区的上下行子帧配比,则对于负载不同的小区来说可能造成一个传输方向上资源浪费而另一个传输方向上资源不足的情况,因此这种由于上下行子帧配比不一致产生的干扰通常无法通过协调相邻小区的上下行子帧配比解决,本发明实施例中NE1通过第一小区CELL1的天线端口向NE2的第二小区CELL2的天线端口发送第一RS,第一RS经历了NE1的CELL1与NE2的CELL2之间的信道,那么NE2就可以根据第一RS消除这种情 况下NE1下的CELL1的下行数据对NE2的上行数据的干扰。It should be noted that, for a cell in the TDD mode, if the frequency ranges of two adjacent or same coverage cells are the same but the uplink and downlink subframe ratios of the cells are different, for example, the downlink time slot of CELL1 is exactly the uplink time slot of CELL2. Then, when there is downlink data on the downlink time slot of CELL1, it will interfere with the signal on the uplink time slot of CELL2. If the uplink and downlink subframe ratios of the neighboring cells are restricted, the resources in one transmission direction may be wasted and the resources in the other transmission direction may be insufficient for the cells with different loads. Therefore, the uplink and downlink subframe ratios are The interference generated by the inconsistency is usually not solved by coordinating the uplink and downlink subframe ratio of the neighboring cell. In the embodiment of the present invention, the NE1 sends the first RS to the antenna port of the second cell CELL2 of the NE2 through the antenna port of the first cell CELL1. An RS experiences the channel between CELL1 of NE1 and CELL2 of NE2, then NE2 can eliminate this situation according to the first RS. In the case, the downlink data of CELL1 under NE1 interferes with the uplink data of NE2.
进一步地,本发明实施例的参考信号的传输方法还适用于TDD小区采用动态小区上下行子帧配比的场景,在这种场景下,TDD小区的小区上下行子帧配比根据小区的负载自动进行动态的调整,这种情况下相邻的TDD小区同样无法保证相邻的小区的小区上下行子帧配比采用相同的配置,因此,相邻小区之间必然存在干扰,采用本发明实施例提供的参考信号的传输方法也能够消除这种动态配置小区上下行子帧配比场景下的干扰,并且,完全无需人工干预。Further, the method for transmitting a reference signal in the embodiment of the present invention is also applicable to a scenario in which a TDD cell adopts a dynamic cell uplink-downlink subframe ratio. In this scenario, the uplink and downlink subframe ratio of the cell of the TDD cell is based on the load of the cell. The dynamic adjustment is performed automatically. In this case, the neighboring TDD cells cannot ensure that the uplink and downlink subframe ratios of the neighboring cells are the same. Therefore, interference between adjacent cells is inevitable, and the present invention is implemented. The method for transmitting the reference signal provided by the example can also eliminate the interference in the uplink and downlink subframe matching scenario of the dynamically configured cell, and does not require manual intervention at all.
可选的,本发明实施例还提供一种启动传输参考信号的方式,当本小区或者相邻小区的小区上下行子帧配比改变,导致本小区与相邻小区的上下行子帧配比不一致时,NE1再启动发送第一RS以供NE2消除来自NE1的干扰的方法,同时,也可以避免在干扰较小时发送第一RS占用较多的时频资源。具体的,在S101之前,还可以包括:NE1检测到CELL1与CELL2的上下行子帧配比不一致。Optionally, the embodiment of the present invention further provides a method for starting to transmit a reference signal, where the ratio of the downlink subframes of the cell in the cell or the neighboring cell is changed, and the ratio of the uplink and downlink subframes of the cell to the neighboring cell is matched. When the interference is inconsistent, the NE1 restarts the method of sending the first RS for the NE2 to cancel the interference from the NE1. At the same time, it is also possible to prevent the first RS from occupying more time-frequency resources when the interference is small. Specifically, before S101, the method may further include: NE1 detects that the uplink and downlink subframe ratios of CELL1 and CELL2 are inconsistent.
可选的,NE1检测到CELL1与CELL2的上行行子帧配比不一致的方法可以有多种,例如,NE2可以定期将NE2下的小区的上下行子帧配比发送给NE1,或者,NE1也可以通过网管或者主动向NE2发起查询消息,获取CELL2的上下行子帧配比。本发明实施例不做限制。图3为图1所示的参考信号的传输方法的一种可选的实施方式的流程示意图。Alternatively, NE1 may detect that the uplink subframe ratio of CELL1 and CELL2 is inconsistent. For example, NE2 may periodically send the uplink and downlink subframe ratio of the cell under NE2 to NE1, or NE1 also You can use the NMS to initiate an inquiry message to NE2 to obtain the uplink and downlink subframe ratio of CELL2. The embodiments of the present invention are not limited. 3 is a schematic flow chart of an alternative embodiment of a method for transmitting a reference signal shown in FIG. 1.
图3为图1所示方法中NE2获取第一配置信息的一种可选的实施方式的流程图。3 is a flow chart of an optional implementation manner in which the NE2 obtains the first configuration information in the method shown in FIG.
在图1至图2所示的各种实施方式的基础上,本发明实施例还提供两种NE2获取第一配置信息的方式。On the basis of the various embodiments shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 2, the embodiment of the present invention further provides two ways for NE2 to obtain the first configuration information.
可选的,在第一种NE2获取第一配置信息方式中,NE2可以预先存储第一配置信息,并根据第一配置信息指示的时频资源接收第一RS。Optionally, in the first mode of acquiring the first configuration information by the NE2, the NE2 may pre-store the first configuration information, and receive the first RS according to the time-frequency resource indicated by the first configuration information.
可选的,在第二种NE2获取第一配置信息方式中,NE2可以预先存储部分第一配置信息,或者,也可以不存储第一配置信息,由NE1在发送第一RS之前将NE2需要的第一RS的配置信息发送给NE2,以指示NE2根据第一配置信息指示的第一RS占用的时频资源接收第一RS。Optionally, in the manner that the second NE2 obtains the first configuration information, the NE2 may pre-store part of the first configuration information, or may not store the first configuration information, and the NE1 needs the NE2 before sending the first RS. The configuration information of the first RS is sent to the NE2 to indicate that the NE2 receives the first RS according to the time-frequency resource occupied by the first RS indicated by the first configuration information.
具体的,可参考图3,在S101之前,还可以包括:Specifically, referring to FIG. 3, before S101, the method may further include:
S301:NE1向NE2发送第二配置信息。S301: NE1 sends second configuration information to NE2.
S302:NE2根据第二配置信息确定第一配置信息。S302: The NE2 determines the first configuration information according to the second configuration information.
其中,NE2可以根据第二配置信息确定第一配置信息,即接收第一RS的时频资源。可选的,若NE2预先存储了部分配置信息,则第二配置信息仅需包含第一配置信息中NE2未存储的部分。本领域技术人员应当明了S301和S302不是必须执行的步骤。The NE2 may determine the first configuration information according to the second configuration information, that is, receive the time-frequency resource of the first RS. Optionally, if the NE2 pre-stores part of the configuration information, the second configuration information only needs to include a part of the first configuration information that is not stored by the NE2. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that S301 and S302 are not necessarily steps that must be performed.
可选的,若NE1需要向多个网络设备发送第一RS,则NE1可以采用广播的方式发送第一RS,即向不同网络设备发送第一RS使用的第一配置信息相同,只是第一RS经过的信道不同。Optionally, if the NE1 needs to send the first RS to the multiple network devices, the NE1 may send the first RS in a broadcast manner, that is, the first configuration information used by the first network to send the same to the different network devices is the same, only the first RS. The passages are different.
本发明实施例提供的参考信号的传输方法,通过第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送参考信号,该参考信号经历第一网络设备和第二网络设备之间的信道,使得第二网络设备能够根据该参考信号消除来自第一网络设备对第二网络设备下的用户设备发送的上行数据的干扰,进而提高上行数据的传输正确率。The method for transmitting a reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present invention sends a reference signal to the second network device by using the first network device, where the reference signal experiences a channel between the first network device and the second network device, so that the second network device can The interference from the first network device to the uplink data sent by the user equipment under the second network device is eliminated according to the reference signal, thereby improving the transmission accuracy of the uplink data.
可选的,为了避免NE1发送第一RS影响NE1下用户设备的下行数据的接收,以及 NE2下用户设备的上行数据的发送,用户设备UE可以确定接收数据或者发送数据时可用的时频资源,所述接收数据或者发送数据时可用的时频资源与第一RS使用的时频资源不重叠,所述第一RS为第一小区CELL1归属的第一网络设备NE1向第二小区CELL2归属的第二网络设备NE2发送的。可选的,用户设备可以包括CELL1下的UE1和CELL2下UE2。可选的,UE1和UE2也可以分别移动到CELL2和CELL1下。Optionally, in order to prevent the first RS from transmitting the downlink data of the user equipment in the NE1, The uplink data of the user equipment in the NE2, the user equipment UE may determine the time-frequency resource available when receiving the data or transmitting the data, and the time-frequency resource available when the received data or the data is sent is not the time-frequency resource used by the first RS. The first RS is sent by the first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs to the second network device NE2 to which the second cell CELL2 belongs. Optionally, the user equipment may include UE1 under CELL1 and UE2 under CELL2. Optionally, UE1 and UE2 can also be moved to CELL2 and CELL1 respectively.
图4为本发明实施例提供的参考信号的传输方法实施例二的第一种可选的实施方式的流程示意图。图5为本发明实施例提供的参考信号的传输方法实施例二的第二种可选的实施方式的流程示意图。FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a first optional implementation manner of Embodiment 2 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a second optional implementation manner of Embodiment 2 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
在图1至图3的上述各实施方式的基础上,可选的,为了避免NE1发送第一RS影响NE1下用户设备的下行数据的接收,本发明实施例还提供两种保证UE下行数据传输的可选的实施方式。On the basis of the foregoing embodiments of FIG. 1 to FIG. 3, in addition, in order to prevent the NE1 from transmitting the first RS to affect the downlink data of the user equipment in the NE1, the embodiment of the present invention further provides two guarantees for downlink data transmission of the UE. An alternative implementation.
本发明实施例的执行主体除了上述的NE1和NE2外,还包括用户设备UE。例如,第一用户设备UE1的服务小区可以归属于NE1。可选的,UE1的服务小区也可以为归属于NE2但与NE1下的小区临近的小区。The executor of the embodiment of the present invention includes a user equipment UE in addition to NE1 and NE2 described above. For example, the serving cell of the first user equipment UE1 may belong to NE1. Optionally, the serving cell of the UE1 may also be a cell that belongs to the NE2 but is adjacent to the cell under the NE1.
可参考图4,在第一种保证UE下行数据传输的可选的实施方式中,本实施方式的步骤可以包括:Referring to FIG. 4, in an optional implementation manner of ensuring downlink data transmission of the UE, the steps of this embodiment may include:
S401:UE1根据第三配置信息,确定接收数据时的可用时频资源。S401: The UE1 determines, according to the third configuration information, an available time-frequency resource when receiving data.
需要说明的是,UE1也可以仅根据与UE1有关的第一RS的配置信息,而不是全部第一配置信息,来确定接收数据时的可用时频资源,即UE1接收下行(DownLink,简称DL)数据的时频资源,第三配置信息可以与第一配置信息相同,也可以是第一配置信息中与UE1有关的时频资源,例如,UE1可以仅考虑第一RS使用的时频资源与UE1使用的子载波或者符号相同的时频资源。可选的,UE1获取与第一配置信息中与UE1有关的第一RS的配置信息的方式与下述的UE1获取与第一配置信息相同的第三配置信息的方式相同。It should be noted that the UE1 may also determine the available time-frequency resources when receiving data according to the configuration information of the first RS related to the UE1, instead of all the first configuration information, that is, the UE1 receives the downlink (DownLink, DL for short). The time-frequency resource of the data, the third configuration information may be the same as the first configuration information, or may be the time-frequency resource related to the UE1 in the first configuration information. For example, the UE1 may consider only the time-frequency resource used by the first RS and the UE1. The subcarriers or symbols with the same time-frequency resources are used. Optionally, the manner in which the UE1 acquires the configuration information of the first RS related to the UE1 in the first configuration information is the same as the manner in which the UE1 acquires the third configuration information that is the same as the first configuration information.
在这种实施方式中,UE1获取第三配置信息的方式可以与NE2获取第一配置信息的方式类似,例如,UE1可以预先存储全部第三配置信息,也可以存储部分第一配置信息或者不存储第一配置信息,由NE1在发送第一RS之前将UE1需要的第一RS的配置信息发送给UE2。具体的,在S401之前,还可以包括:In this embodiment, the manner in which the UE1 obtains the third configuration information may be similar to the manner in which the NE2 obtains the first configuration information. For example, the UE1 may store all the third configuration information in advance, or may store part of the first configuration information or not. The first configuration information is sent by the NE1 to the UE2 for the configuration information of the first RS required by the UE1 before the first RS is sent. Specifically, before S401, the method may further include:
S410:NE1向UE1发送第三配置信息。S410: NE1 sends third configuration information to UE1.
其中,第三配置信息用于指示UE1接收下行数据时可用的时频资源,所述UE1从所述NE1接收下行数据时可用的时频资源与所述第一配置信息指示的所述NE1发送所述第一RS使用的时频资源不重叠。The third configuration information is used to indicate the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 receives the downlink data, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 receives the downlink data from the NE1 and the NE1 sending station indicated by the first configuration information. The time-frequency resources used by the first RS do not overlap.
可选的,NE1可以通过物理层信令发送第三配置信息。例如,NE1通过数据控制指示信息DCI发送第三配置信息。Optionally, NE1 may send the third configuration information by using physical layer signaling. For example, NE1 transmits the third configuration information through the data control indication information DCI.
可选的,NE1可以通过无线资源控制RRC消息发送第三配置信息。若使用RRC消息发送第三配置信息时可以不发送第一RS的子帧,UE可以在RRC消息中获得对应的子帧,从而节省消息发送的开销。进一步的,NE1可以通过高层信令发送第三配置信息。可选的,高层信令例如可以是广播消息、UE专用信息。Optionally, the NE1 may send the third configuration information by using a radio resource control RRC message. If the RRC message is used to send the third configuration information, the UE may not send the subframe of the first RS, and the UE may obtain the corresponding subframe in the RRC message, thereby saving the overhead of message transmission. Further, NE1 may send the third configuration information by using high layer signaling. Optionally, the high layer signaling may be, for example, a broadcast message or UE specific information.
具体来说,NE1可以通过广播消息和/或UE专用信息发送所述第三配置信息。例如,NE1可以将第一RS的子帧信息和第一RS的RE指示信息分别通过广播消息和UE专用信 息发送给所述UE1,又如,NE1可以将第一RS的子帧信息和第一RS的RE指示信息均通过广播消息发送给所述UE1,或者,NE1可以将第一RS的子帧信息和第一RS的RE指示信息均通过UE专用信息发送给所述UE1。Specifically, the NE1 may send the third configuration information by using a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information. For example, NE1 may pass the subframe information of the first RS and the RE indication information of the first RS through a broadcast message and a UE-specific letter, respectively. For example, the UE may send the subframe information of the first RS and the RE indication information of the first RS to the UE1 by using a broadcast message, or the NE1 may use the subframe information of the first RS. And the RE indication information of the first RS is sent to the UE1 by using UE-specific information.
可选的,NE1也可以通过主系统信息块MIB消息,或者,系统信息块SIB消息向所述UE1发送所述第三配置信息。Optionally, the NE1 may also send the third configuration information to the UE1 by using a primary system information block MIB message or a system information block SIB message.
需要说明的是,UE专用信息中通常包含指定的UE的标识,即UE专用信息发给部分UE的,而广播消息,是不限定UE标识的,即可以发给小区所有的UE。当使用UE专用信息发送第三配置信息时,由于可以确定UE所在的子载波,因此,第三配置信息可以只包含第一RS占用的RE所在的符号,UE1即可确定可用的时频资源。It should be noted that the UE-specific information usually includes the identifier of the specified UE, that is, the UE-specific information is sent to the part of the UE, and the broadcast message is not limited to the UE identifier, that is, it can be sent to all UEs in the cell. When the third configuration information is sent by using the UE-specific information, the third configuration information may include only the symbol in which the RE occupied by the first RS is located, and the UE1 may determine the available time-frequency resources.
可选的,若第三配置信息包括所述第三RE指示信息,且所述第三RE指示的所述第一RS占用的RE与所述UE1的物理下行共享信道PDSCH的RE重叠,Optionally, if the third configuration information includes the third RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE overlaps with the RE of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH of the UE1,
则所述UE1接收所述NE1发送的所述第三配置信息;所述UE1确定的所述接收数据时可用的时频资源为,所述UE1的PDSCH中与所述第一RS占用的RE不重叠的RE。The UE1 receives the third configuration information that is sent by the NE1, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE1 determines the received data is that the RE of the UE1 and the RE occupied by the first RS are not Overlapping REs.
例如,UE1将PDSCH中第一RS占用的RE位置扣除。For example, UE1 deducts the RE location occupied by the first RS in the PDSCH.
需要说明的是,若UE1预先存储了第一配置信息则S410不是必选的步骤。It should be noted that if the UE1 stores the first configuration information in advance, S410 is not a mandatory step.
在这种实施方式中,UE1可以根据NE1调度下行数据时指示的接收下行数据的时频资源接收数据,从而避免误将第一RS占用的时频资源上的数据当做下行数据处理。也就是说,在这种实施方式中,在NE1向NE2发送第一RS时,UE1仍可以正确的接收下行数据。In this embodiment, the UE1 may receive data according to the time-frequency resource of the received downlink data indicated when the downlink data is scheduled by the NE1, so as to avoid erroneously treating the data on the time-frequency resource occupied by the first RS as downlink data processing. That is to say, in this embodiment, when the first RS is sent by NE1 to NE2, UE1 can still correctly receive downlink data.
可参考图5,在第二种保证UE下行数据传输的可选的实施方式中,在NE1向UE1发送下行数据之前,可以包括:Referring to FIG. 5, in an optional implementation manner of ensuring downlink data transmission of the UE, before the downlink data is sent by the UE1 to the UE1, the method may include:
S501:NE1根据第一配置信息确定向第一用户设备UE1发送下行数据时可用的时频资源。S501: The NE1 determines, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the downlink data is sent to the first user equipment UE1.
在这种实施方式中,UE1可以根据NE1调度下行数据时指示的接收下行数据的时频资源接收数据,而不用针对下行数据中的第一RS进行特殊处理,即UE1的处理与现有UE完全相同。也就是说,在这种实施方式中,不需要更换UE就可以支持网络设备的改进。In this embodiment, the UE1 may receive data according to the time-frequency resource of the received downlink data indicated when the downlink data is scheduled by the NE1, without special processing for the first RS in the downlink data, that is, the processing of the UE1 is completely complete with the existing UE. the same. That is to say, in this embodiment, the improvement of the network device can be supported without replacing the UE.
图6为本发明实施例提供的参考信号的传输方法实施例三的第一种可选的实施方式的流程示意图。图7为本发明实施例提供的参考信号的传输方法实施例三的第二种可选的实施方式的流程示意图。FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a first optional implementation manner of Embodiment 3 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a second optional implementation manner of Embodiment 3 of a method for transmitting a reference signal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
在图1至图5及上述各实施方式的基础上,类似的,为了避免NE2下的用户设备发送上行数据影响NE2接收第一RS,本发明实施例还提供两种保证UE上行数据传输的可选的实施方式。本发明实施例的执行主体除了上述的NE1和NE2外,还可以包括用户设备UE。例如,第二用户设备UE2的服务小区可以归属于NE2。可选的,UE2的服务小区也可以为归属于NE1但与NE2下的小区临近的小区。On the basis of FIG. 1 to FIG. 5 and the foregoing embodiments, in order to prevent the user equipment in the NE2 from transmitting uplink data and affecting the NE2 to receive the first RS, the embodiment of the present invention further provides two types of uplink data transmission for the UE. Selected implementation. The executor of the embodiment of the present invention may further include a user equipment UE in addition to NE1 and NE2 described above. For example, the serving cell of the second user equipment UE2 may belong to NE2. Optionally, the serving cell of the UE2 may also be a cell that belongs to the NE1 but is adjacent to the cell under the NE2.
可参考图6,在第一种保证UE上行数据传输的可选的实施方式中,本实施方式的步骤可以包括:Referring to FIG. 6, in an optional implementation manner of ensuring uplink data transmission of the UE, the steps of this embodiment may include:
S601:UE2根据第四配置信息,确定发送数据时的可用时频资源。S601: The UE2 determines, according to the fourth configuration information, an available time-frequency resource when the data is sent.
其中,由于NE1向NE2发送第一RS会占用NE2接收UE2发送数据的时频资源,即 UE2发送上行(UpLink,简称UL)数据的时频资源,因此,UE2需要根据第一RS占用的时频资源,确定发送数据时可用的时频资源,以避免发送数据的冲突。The NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2 to occupy the time-frequency resource that the NE2 receives the data sent by the UE2, that is, The UE2 sends the time-frequency resources of the Uplink (UL) data. Therefore, the UE2 needs to determine the time-frequency resources available when the data is transmitted according to the time-frequency resources occupied by the first RS, so as to avoid conflicts in the transmitted data.
需要说明的是,UE2也可以仅根据与UE2有关的第一RS的配置信息,而不是全部第一配置信息,来确定接收数据时的可用时频资源,即,第四配置信息可以与第一配置信息相同,也可以是第一配置信息中与UE2有关的时频资源,例如,UE2可以仅考虑第一RS使用的时频资源与UE2使用的子载波或者符号相同的时频资源,可选的,UE2获取与UE2有关的第一RS的配置信息的方式与下述的UE2获取与第一配置信息相同的第四配置信息的方式相同。It should be noted that the UE2 may also determine the available time-frequency resources when receiving data according to the configuration information of the first RS related to the UE2, instead of all the first configuration information, that is, the fourth configuration information may be the first The configuration information is the same, and may be the time-frequency resource related to the UE2 in the first configuration information. For example, the UE2 may consider only the time-frequency resource used by the first RS and the time-frequency resource with the same sub-carrier or symbol used by the UE2. The manner in which the UE 2 acquires the configuration information of the first RS related to the UE 2 is the same as the manner in which the UE 2 acquires the fourth configuration information that is the same as the first configuration information.
在这种实施方式中,UE2获取第四配置信息的方式可以与NE2获取第一配置信息的方式类似,例如,UE2可以预先存储全部第四配置信息,也可以存储部分第一配置信息或者不存储第一配置信息,在NE2获取第一配置信息后,例如NE1向NE2发送第二配置信息之后,由NE2将UE2需要的第一RS的配置信息发送给UE2。具体的,在S601之前,还可以包括:In this embodiment, the manner in which the UE 2 obtains the fourth configuration information may be similar to the manner in which the NE2 obtains the first configuration information. For example, the UE 2 may store all the fourth configuration information in advance, or may store part of the first configuration information or not. After the first configuration information is obtained by the NE2, for example, after the NE1 sends the second configuration information to the NE2, the NE2 sends the configuration information of the first RS required by the UE2 to the UE2. Specifically, before S601, the method may further include:
S610:NE2向UE2发送第四配置信息。S610: NE2 sends fourth configuration information to UE2.
其中,第四配置信息用于指示UE2向NE2发送上行数据的可用的时频资源,所述UE2向所述NE2发送上行数据时可用的时频资源与所述第一配置信息指示的所述NE1发送所述第一RS使用的时频资源不重叠。The fourth configuration information is used to indicate that the UE2 sends the available time-frequency resources of the uplink data to the NE2, and the time-frequency resources available when the UE2 sends the uplink data to the NE2 and the NE1 indicated by the first configuration information. The time-frequency resources used for transmitting the first RS do not overlap.
需要说明的是,若UE2预先存储了第四配置信息则S610不是必选的步骤。It should be noted that if the UE 2 stores the fourth configuration information in advance, S610 is not a mandatory step.
可选的,NE2可以通过物理层信令发送第四配置信息。例如,NE2通过数据控制指示信息DCI发送第四配置信息。Optionally, NE2 may send the fourth configuration information by using physical layer signaling. For example, NE2 transmits the fourth configuration information through the data control indication information DCI.
可选的,NE2可以通过无线资源控制RRC消息发送第四配置信息。若使用RRC消息发送第四配置信息时可以不发送第一RS的子帧,UE可以在RRC消息中获得对应的子帧,从而节省消息发送的开销。进一步的,NE2可以通过高层信令发送第四配置信息。可选的,高层信令例如可以是广播消息、UE专用信息。Optionally, NE2 may send fourth configuration information by using a radio resource control RRC message. If the RRC message is used to send the fourth configuration information, the UE may not send the subframe of the first RS, and the UE may obtain the corresponding subframe in the RRC message, thereby saving the overhead of message transmission. Further, the NE2 can send the fourth configuration information by using the high layer signaling. Optionally, the high layer signaling may be, for example, a broadcast message or UE specific information.
具体来说,NE2可以通过广播消息和/或UE专用信息发送所述第四配置信息。例如,NE2可以将第一RS的子帧信息和第一RS的RE指示信息分别通过广播消息和UE专用信息发送给所述UE2,又如,NE2可以将第一RS的子帧信息和第一RS的RE指示信息均通过广播消息发送给所述UE2,或者,NE2可以将第一RS的子帧信息和第一RS的RE指示信息均通过UE专用信息发送给所述UE2。Specifically, the NE2 may send the fourth configuration information by using a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information. For example, NE2 may send the subframe information of the first RS and the RE indication information of the first RS to the UE2 through the broadcast message and the UE-specific information, respectively. For example, the NE2 may use the subframe information of the first RS and the first The RE indication information of the RS is sent to the UE2 by using a broadcast message, or the NE2 may send the subframe information of the first RS and the RE indication information of the first RS to the UE2 through the UE-specific information.
可选的,NE2也可以通过主系统信息块MIB消息,或者,系统信息块SIB消息向所述UE2发送所述第四配置信息。Optionally, the NE2 may also send the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using a primary system information block MIB message or a system information block SIB message.
需要说明的是,UE专用信息中通常包含指定的UE的标识,即UE专用信息发给部分UE的,而广播消息,是不限定UE标识的,即可以发给小区所有的UE。当使用UE专用信息发送第四配置信息时,由于可以确定UE所在的子载波,因此,第四配置信息可以只包含第一RS占用的RE所在的符号,UE2即可确定可用的时频资源。It should be noted that the UE-specific information usually includes the identifier of the specified UE, that is, the UE-specific information is sent to the part of the UE, and the broadcast message is not limited to the UE identifier, that is, it can be sent to all UEs in the cell. When the fourth configuration information is sent by using the UE-specific information, since the sub-carrier in which the UE is located may be determined, the fourth configuration information may only include the symbol in which the RE occupied by the first RS is located, and the UE2 may determine the available time-frequency resource.
可选的,若第四配置信息包括所述第四RE指示信息,且所述第四RE指示的所述第一RS占用的RE与所述UE2的物理上行共享信道PUSCH的RE重叠,Optionally, if the fourth configuration information includes the fourth RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the fourth RE overlaps with the RE of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH of the UE2,
则所述UE2接收所述NE2发送的所述第四配置信息;所述UE2确定的所述发送数据时可用的时频资源为,所述UE2的PUSCH中与所述第一RS占用的RE不重叠的RE。 The UE2 receives the fourth configuration information that is sent by the NE2; the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE2 determines the data to be sent is that the RE of the UE2 and the RE occupied by the first RS are not Overlapping REs.
在这种实施方式中,UE2可以根据NE2调度上行数据时指示的发送上行数据的时频资源发送数据,避免使用第一RS占用的时频资源发送上行数据,从而避免NE2误将UE2在第一RS占用的时频资源上发送的上行数据当做第一RS处理。也就是说,在这种实施方式中,在NE1向NE2发送第一RS时,UE仍可以正确的接收下行数据。In this implementation manner, the UE2 may send data according to the time-frequency resource of the uplink data that is indicated when the uplink data is scheduled by the NE2, and avoid using the time-frequency resource occupied by the first RS to send the uplink data, thereby preventing the NE2 from mistaking the UE2 in the first. The uplink data sent on the time-frequency resource occupied by the RS is treated as the first RS. That is to say, in this embodiment, when the first RS is sent by NE1 to NE2, the UE can still correctly receive downlink data.
可参考图7,在第二种保证UE下行数据传输的可选的实施方式中,在UE2发送上行数据之前,可以包括:Referring to FIG. 7, in an optional implementation manner of ensuring downlink data transmission of the UE, before the UE2 sends the uplink data, the method may include:
S701:NE2根据第一配置信息确定UE2发送上行数据时可用的时频资源。S701: The NE2 determines, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the UE2 sends the uplink data.
在这种实施方式中,UE2可以根据NE2调度上行数据时指示的发送上行数据的时频资源发送数据,使得UE2不用考虑发送上行数据时与第一RS占用的时频资源的冲突,即UE2的处理与现有UE完全相同。也就是说,在这种实施方式中,不需要更换UE就可以支持网络设备的改进。In this embodiment, the UE2 may send data according to the time-frequency resource of the uplink data that is indicated when the uplink data is scheduled by the NE2, so that the UE2 does not need to consider the conflict with the time-frequency resource occupied by the first RS when the uplink data is sent, that is, the UE2 The processing is exactly the same as the existing UE. That is to say, in this embodiment, the improvement of the network device can be supported without replacing the UE.
可选的,UE1也可以执行上述图6至图7所示的UE2执行的方法,相应的,UE2也可以执行上述图4至图5所示的UE1执行的方法。Alternatively, the UE1 may also perform the method performed by the UE2 shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 7 above. Correspondingly, the UE2 may also perform the method performed by the UE1 shown in FIG. 4 to FIG. 5 above.
在图1至图7所示的上述各种实施方式的基础上,本发明实施例还提供六种第一配置信息的可选的实施方式。NE1可以采用下面的第一配置信息的可选的实施方式中的一种或者多种的组合发送第一RS。Based on the foregoing various embodiments shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 7 , an embodiment of the present invention further provides an optional implementation manner of six first configuration information. The NE1 may transmit the first RS by using one or more of the optional embodiments of the following first configuration information.
第一种第一配置信息的可选的实施方式中,NE1的CELL1可以包括至少一个天线端口,则第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息可以包括:In an optional implementation manner of the first configuration information, the CELL1 of the NE1 may include at least one antenna port, and the first RE indication information of the first configuration information may include:
与所述NE1的各个天线端口对应的导频图案,所述导频图案用于指示所述NE1的各个天线端口发送所述第一RS的RE位置。And a pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port of the NE1, where the pilot pattern is used to indicate that each antenna port of the NE1 sends an RE position of the first RS.
其中,每个天线端口发送第一RS的RE位置可以对应一个导频图案,或者各个天线端口发送第一RS的RE位置可以组成一个导频图案。举例来说,NE1的CELL1可以包括1个或者多个天线端口,则第一RE指示信息可以为1个导频图案或者多个导频图案,每个天线端口可以对应一个导频图案。每个导频图案可以包括至少一个RE位置。可选的,多个天线端口中的多于一个天线端口的导频图案可以是相同的。The RE position of each antenna port that sends the first RS may correspond to one pilot pattern, or the RE position of each antenna port that sends the first RS may form a pilot pattern. For example, the CELL1 of the NE1 may include one or more antenna ports, and the first RE indication information may be one pilot pattern or multiple pilot patterns, and each antenna port may correspond to one pilot pattern. Each pilot pattern can include at least one RE location. Optionally, the pilot patterns of more than one of the plurality of antenna ports may be the same.
图8为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第一种可选的实施方式的示意图。图9为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第二种可选的实施方式的示意图。图10为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第三种可选的实施方式的示意图。图11为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第四种可选的实施方式的第一部分示意图。图12为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第四种可选的实施方式的第二部分示意图。图13为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第五种可选的实施方式的第二部分示意图。图14为第一配置信息的第一RE指示信息的第六种可选的实施方式的示意图。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a first alternative embodiment of first RE indication information of the first configuration information. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a second alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a third alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information. 11 is a first partial schematic diagram of a fourth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information. 12 is a second partial schematic diagram of a fourth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a second part of a fifth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information. 14 is a schematic diagram of a sixth alternative embodiment of the first RE indication information of the first configuration information.
可选的,若所述NE1的CELL1可以包括多个天线端口,每个天线端口上发送第一RS的RE位置可以是符号相同但子载波不同的一组RE,如图8所示,也可以是所在的子载波相同但符号不同的一组RE,如图9所示。需要说明的是,其中R0、R1、R2、R3分别为CRS的RE,NE1可以为eNB1,NE2可以为eNB2,第一RS的RE位置可以避开与CRS冲突的RE位置,可选的,第一RS的RE位置也可以避开与上行DMRS和/或下行DMRS冲突的RE位置,可参考图10。当第一配置信息中的第一RE指示信息指示的第一RS占用的RE位置位于相同的子载波,或者位于相同的符号时,NE1通知UE1的第三配 置信息中携带的第三RE指示信息中可以不用说明具体的RE位置,而仅指出第一RS所在的载波或者所在的符号,以节省消息发送的开销。类似的,NE2通知UE2的第四配置信息中携带的第四RE指示信息,以及NE1通知NE2的第二配置信息中携带的第二RE指示信息也可以仅指出第一RS所在的载波或者所在的符号,以节省消息发送的开销。Optionally, if the CELL1 of the NE1 may include multiple antenna ports, the RE position of the first RS sent on each antenna port may be a group of REs with the same symbol but different subcarriers, as shown in FIG. It is a group of REs with the same subcarriers but different symbols, as shown in Figure 9. It should be noted that, where R 0 , R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are REs of the CRS, NE1 may be eNB1, and NE2 may be eNB2, and the RE position of the first RS may avoid the RE position that conflicts with the CRS. Optionally, the RE location of the first RS may also avoid the RE location that conflicts with the uplink DMRS and/or the downlink DMRS. Referring to FIG. 10 . When the first RE indication information in the first configuration information indicates that the RE locations of the first RS are located in the same subcarrier, or are located in the same symbol, the NE1 notifies the third RE indication information carried in the third configuration information of the UE1. Instead of specifying a specific RE location, only the carrier or the symbol in which the first RS is located may be indicated to save the overhead of message transmission. Similarly, NE2 notifies the fourth RE indication information carried in the fourth configuration information of the UE2, and the second RE indication information carried in the second configuration information of the NE1 notification NE2 may also indicate only the carrier or the location where the first RS is located. Symbol to save the overhead of message delivery.
可选的,每个天线端口上发送第一RS的RE位置可以是其他预定义的RE位置组成的导频图案。可参考图11。NE1可以具有4个天线端口,其中,R31、R32R33、R34为第一种可选的第一RS的各个天线端口占用的RE位置,R35、R36R37、R38可以为第二种可选的第一RS的各个天线端口占用的RE位置。一种具备兼容性的导频图案的可选方案中,各个天线端口对应的导频图案可以为信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal简称CSI-RS)可选的导频图案集合中的一种。Optionally, the RE location of the first RS sent on each antenna port may be a pilot pattern composed of other predefined RE locations. Refer to Figure 11. The NE1 can have four antenna ports, wherein R 31 , R 32 R 33 , and R 34 are the RE positions occupied by the respective antenna ports of the first optional first RS, and R 35 , R 36 R 37 , and R 38 can be The RE position occupied by each antenna port of the second optional first RS. In an alternative scheme with a compatible pilot pattern, the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port may be a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) optional pilot pattern set. One.
具体的,协议中提供了CSI-RS的多种可选的导频图案,本发明实施例的第一RS可以选择其中任一种导频图案。则第二配置信息、第三配置信息、第四配置信息中可以只包含CSI-RS的导频图案的类型指示标识,就可以确定出第一RE指示信息中指示的第一RS占用的RE位置。并且,由于使用CSI-RS的导频图案发送第一RS,UE现有的处理流程不会使用CSI-RS占用的时频资源上接收或者发送数据,因此,采用CSI-RS的任一导频图案作为第一RS的导频图案的方式,使得UE不需要改变处理流程,就可以支持网络设备的改进。Specifically, a plurality of optional pilot patterns of the CSI-RS are provided in the protocol, and the first RS of the embodiment of the present invention may select any one of the pilot patterns. The second configuration information, the third configuration information, and the fourth configuration information may include only the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern of the CSI-RS, and the RE position occupied by the first RS indicated in the first RE indication information may be determined. . Moreover, since the first RS is transmitted by using the pilot pattern of the CSI-RS, the existing processing procedure of the UE does not use the time-frequency resource occupied by the CSI-RS to receive or transmit data, and therefore, any pilot using the CSI-RS is adopted. The pattern is used as the pilot pattern of the first RS, so that the UE can support the improvement of the network device without changing the processing flow.
可选的,导频图案中不同天线端口对应的第一RS占用的RE位置可以相同,NE1可以采用码分的方式,根据导频图案指示的第一RS的RE位置从不同天线端口将第一RS发送给NE2。Optionally, the RE positions of the first RSs corresponding to different antenna ports in the pilot pattern may be the same, and the NE1 may adopt a code division manner, and the RE position of the first RS indicated by the pilot pattern is first from different antenna ports. The RS is sent to NE2.
可选的,在第二配置信息、第三配置信息、第四配置信息中,可以仅通知导频图案的类型,该导频图案的类型可以为天线端口数,则接收方的网络设备或用户设备可以根据导频图案的类型确定第一配置信息。其中,导频图案的类型是指由确定一个导频图案的包括在导频图案的类型指示标识中的参数。Optionally, in the second configuration information, the third configuration information, and the fourth configuration information, only the type of the pilot pattern may be notified, where the type of the pilot pattern may be the number of antenna ports, and the network device or user of the receiver The device may determine the first configuration information according to the type of the pilot pattern. Wherein, the type of the pilot pattern refers to a parameter included in the type indication flag of the pilot pattern determined by determining a pilot pattern.
当发送第一RS的第一小区所属基站对应的天线端口数的数量大于1时,可以在每个天线端口使用不同的导频图案发送所述第一RS,则导频图案的类型指示标识可以用于为不同的天线端口号指示发送第一RS所采用的导频图案。When the number of antenna ports corresponding to the base station to which the first cell of the first RS is sent is greater than 1, the first RS may be sent by using a different pilot pattern on each antenna port, and the type indication of the pilot pattern may be A pilot pattern used to transmit the first RS for different antenna port numbers.
导频图案的类型指示标识可以包括:参考信号的类型、天线端口数、天线端口号、导频图案索引中一种或者多种。The type indication identifier of the pilot pattern may include one or more of a type of reference signal, an antenna port number, an antenna port number, and a pilot pattern index.
其中,导频图案索引用于指示一个或者多个导频图案中的一个导频图案。The pilot pattern index is used to indicate one of the one or more pilot patterns.
可选的,参考信号的类型可以包括小区间参考信号、CSI-RS、DMRS、SRS等。可选的,CSI-RS、DMRS、SRS可以分别对应一个可选导频图案集合,并可以采用天线端口数、天线端口号、导频图案索引中一种或多种对每一种导频图案进行标识。可选的,当第一小区和第二小区预先约定了使用的参考信号的类型,则导频图案的类型指示标识中也可以不包括参考信号的类型,而仅包括天线端口数、天线端口号、导频图案索引中一种或多种。Optionally, the type of the reference signal may include an inter-cell reference signal, a CSI-RS, a DMRS, an SRS, and the like. Optionally, the CSI-RS, the DMRS, and the SRS may respectively correspond to a set of selectable pilot patterns, and may adopt one or more of an antenna port number, an antenna port number, and a pilot pattern index for each pilot pattern. Mark it. Optionally, when the first cell and the second cell pre-arrange the type of the reference signal used, the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern may not include the type of the reference signal, but only the number of antenna ports and the antenna port number. One or more of the pilot pattern indexes.
可选的,当参考信号的类型为CSI-RS时,导频图案的类型指示标识可以包括天线端口数和导频图案索引,即天线端口号为可选的。NE和UE可以根据天线端口数确定天线端口号,比如根据天线端口数从可选的导频图案的天线端口号集合中按预定的顺序选相应天线端口数的天线端口号。示例的,在LTE中,发送CSI-RS可选的导频图案的天线端口 号可以为{15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22},当发送CSI-RS使用的天线端口数为1时,对应的天线端口号为15,当发送CSI-RS使用的天线端口数为2时,对应的天线端口号为{15,16},当发送CSI-RS的天线端口数为4时,对应的天线端口号为{15,16,17,18},以此类推。因此导频图案的类型指示标识可以仅包含天线端口数和导频图案索引。其中,导频图案索引以LTE协议为例,LTE协议中定义的CSI-RS的可选导频图案有32种,导频图案索引可以为0~31。具体实施时,可以根据具体的系统,取值可以不同,在此不做限制。Optionally, when the type of the reference signal is CSI-RS, the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern may include an antenna port number and a pilot pattern index, that is, the antenna port number is optional. The NE and the UE may determine the antenna port number according to the number of antenna ports. For example, the antenna port number of the corresponding antenna port number is selected in a predetermined order from the set of antenna port numbers of the optional pilot pattern according to the number of antenna ports. For example, in LTE, an antenna port that transmits a CSI-RS optional pilot pattern The number can be {15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22}. When the number of antenna ports used for transmitting CSI-RS is 1, the corresponding antenna port number is 15, when transmitting CSI-RS. When the number of antenna ports is 2, the corresponding antenna port number is {15, 16}. When the number of antenna ports for transmitting CSI-RS is 4, the corresponding antenna port number is {15, 16, 17, 18}. analogy. Therefore, the type indication indicator of the pilot pattern may only include the number of antenna ports and the pilot pattern index. The pilot pattern index is exemplified by the LTE protocol. There are 32 types of optional pilot patterns of the CSI-RS defined in the LTE protocol, and the pilot pattern index may be 0 to 31. In the specific implementation, the value may be different according to the specific system, and no limitation is imposed here.
可选的,当参考信号的类型为DMRS时,导频图案的类型指示标识可以包括天线端口号,例如,在LTE网络中,在天线端口号为7、8、11、13的天线端口上发送DMRS的导频图案为同一导频图案,天线端口号为9、10、12、14的天线端口上发送DMRS的导频图案为同一导频图案,则当参考信号的类型为DMRS时,导频图案的类型指示标识可以仅包括天线端口号。具体实施时,可以根据具体的系统,取值可以不同,在此不做限制。Optionally, when the type of the reference signal is DMRS, the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern may include an antenna port number, for example, in an LTE network, sending on an antenna port with antenna port numbers 7, 8, 11, and 13. The pilot pattern of the DMRS is the same pilot pattern, and the pilot pattern of the DMRS transmitted on the antenna ports of the antenna port numbers 9, 10, 12, and 14 is the same pilot pattern, and when the type of the reference signal is DMRS, the pilot is used. The type indication of the pattern may include only the antenna port number. In the specific implementation, the value may be different according to the specific system, and no limitation is imposed here.
可选的,当参考信号的类型为SRS时,导频图案可以是预先约定的导频图案,则导频图案的类型指示标识可以仅指示参考信号的类型。具体的预先约定的导频图案可以是现有LTE协议中定义的导频图案,也可以是其他的导频图案,在此不做限制。Optionally, when the type of the reference signal is SRS, the pilot pattern may be a pre-agreed pilot pattern, and the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern may only indicate the type of the reference signal. The specific pre-defined pilot pattern may be a pilot pattern defined in the existing LTE protocol, or may be other pilot patterns, and is not limited herein.
可选的,对于多个网络设备相互发送第一RS的情况,向同一网络设备发送的的第一RS的第一配置信息的子帧信息可以相同,向同一网络设备发送的的第一RS的第一配置信息的RE位置可以相同也可以不同,若RE位置相同则各个第一RS可以采用OCC码分的方式复用相同的RE。Optionally, in a case that multiple network devices send the first RS to each other, the subframe information of the first configuration information of the first RS that is sent to the same network device may be the same, and the first RS that is sent to the same network device The RE locations of the first configuration information may be the same or different. If the RE locations are the same, each of the first RSs may multiplex the same RE by using an OCC code division.
可参考图12和图13,NE1可以为eNB1,NE2可以为eNB2,可选的。其中,eNB1、eNB2和eNB3的下的小区均为4天线端口。则eNB1、eNB2和eNB3分别发送第一RS的时候,各个天线端口对应的导频图案可以如图12和图13所示。R31、R32R33、R34为第一种可选的第一RS的各个天线端口占用的RE位置,R35、R36R37、R38可以为第二种可选的第一RS的各个天线端口占用的RE位置。Referring to FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, NE1 may be eNB1, and NE2 may be eNB2, which is optional. The cells under eNB1, eNB2, and eNB3 are all 4-antenna ports. When the eNB1, the eNB2, and the eNB3 respectively send the first RS, the pilot patterns corresponding to the respective antenna ports may be as shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. R 31 , R 32 R 33 , R 34 are the RE positions occupied by the respective antenna ports of the first optional first RS, and R 35 , R 36 R 37 , R 38 may be the second optional first RS The RE position occupied by each antenna port.
可选的,R31、R32R33、R34可以为eNB1的四个天线端口发送第一RS的RE位置,R35、R36R37、R38可以为eNB 2的四个天线端口发送第一RS的RE位置。则eNB 1的R31、R32可以采用OCC码分,R33、R34可以采用OCC码分。类似的,eNB 2的R35、R36可以采用OCC码分,R37、R38可以采用OCC码分。Optionally, R 31 , R 32 R 33 , and R 34 may send the RE position of the first RS for the four antenna ports of the eNB1, and R 35 , R 36 R 37 , and R 38 may send the four antenna ports of the eNB 2 . The RE position of the first RS. Then, R 31 and R 32 of eNB 1 may be divided into OCC codes, and R 33 and R 34 may be divided by OCC codes. Similarly, R 35 and R 36 of eNB 2 may be divided by OCC codes, and R 37 and R 38 may be divided by OCC codes.
可选的,R31、R32、R35、R36可以为eNB1的四个天线端口发送第一RS的RE位置,R33、R34、R37、R38为eNB 2的四个天线端口发送第一RS的RE位置。Optionally, R 31 , R 32 , R 35 , and R 36 may send the RE position of the first RS for the four antenna ports of the eNB1, and R 33 , R 34 , R 37 , and R 38 are the four antenna ports of the eNB 2 . Send the RE location of the first RS.
可选的,还可以有NE3为eNB3,还可以有NE4为eNB4,R31、R32可以为eNB1的四个天线端口发送第一RS的RE位置,R33、R34可以为eNB2的四个天线端口发送第一RS的RE位置,R35、R36为可以为eNB3的四个天线端口发送第一RS的RE位置,R37、R38为可以为eNB4的四个天线端口发送第一RS的RE位置。Alternatively, there may also be of the eNB3 NE3, NE4 can also be of eNB4, R 31, R 32 may be a four-antenna transmission eNB1 position RE of the first port of the RS, R 33, R 34 may be a four eNB2 The antenna port sends the RE position of the first RS, R 35 and R 36 are RE positions that can send the first RS for the four antenna ports of the eNB3, and R 37 and R 38 are the first RS that can be sent for the four antenna ports of the eNB4. RE location.
第二种第一配置信息的可选的实施方式中,第一配置信息中第一RS的子帧可以是专用子帧。In an optional implementation manner of the second configuration information, the subframe of the first RS in the first configuration information may be a dedicated subframe.
需要说明的是,一般的子帧通常可以发送PDCCH等控制信息、PDSCH等数据信息、CRS等参考信号以及其他的信息。本发明实施例定义的专用子帧用于发送第一RS,或者 第一RS和控制信息,即该专用子帧上不发送PDSCH等数据信息。It should be noted that a general subframe may normally transmit control information such as a PDCCH, data information such as a PDSCH, a reference signal such as a CRS, and other information. The dedicated subframe defined in the embodiment of the present invention is used to send the first RS, or The first RS and the control information, that is, the data information such as the PDSCH is not transmitted on the dedicated subframe.
可选的,第一RS的子帧的配置方式可以采用MBSFN子帧的配置方式,MBSFN子帧的配置结果具体可以是的,10个子帧中的一个或多个子帧为MBSFN子帧。Optionally, the configuration of the subframe of the first RS may be configured by using an MBSFN subframe, and the configuration result of the MBSFN subframe may be specifically, and one or more subframes of the 10 subframes are MBSFN subframes.
一种具备兼容性的子帧和RE位置组合的可选方案中,第一配置信息中的第一RS的子帧可以为发送PDCCH或者CRS的子帧,该子帧上包含的数据可以有几种情况:第一种情况:只包含第一RS,即不包含PDCCH、CRS、PMCH及其他信息;第二种情况:包含所述第一RS和PDCCH信息,或者包含所述第一RS和CRS信息,或者包含所述第一RS和PDCCH信息和CRS信息。基于通过发送PDCCH或者CRS的子帧发送第一RS的第二种情况,该第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧中PDCCH信息可以位于第1至第4个符号。采用这种发送方式,不会影响PDCCH信息的容量,可以减少对UE正常交互信息的影响。In an optional combination of a subframe and a RE location, the subframe of the first RS in the first configuration information may be a subframe in which a PDCCH or a CRS is transmitted, and the data included in the subframe may have several Case: the first case: only the first RS, that is, does not include PDCCH, CRS, PMCH, and other information; the second case: includes the first RS and PDCCH information, or includes the first RS and CRS Information, or including the first RS and PDCCH information and CRS information. The PDCCH information in the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS may be located in the first to fourth symbols based on the second case of transmitting the first RS by using the subframe in which the PDCCH or the CRS is transmitted. The transmission mode does not affect the capacity of the PDCCH information, and the impact on the normal interaction information of the UE can be reduced.
另一种具备兼容性的子帧和RE位置组合的可选方案中,第一配置信息中的第一RS的子帧信息可以为用于解调的参考信号(Demodulation Reference Signal,DMRS)可选的子帧信息的集合中的一种,第一配置信息中的第一RE指示信息可以选择DMRS可选的符号位置位置的集合中的一种。示例的,DMRS可选的子帧信息和符号位置具体可参考36.211协议,也可以参考其他协议中的定义,在此不予限定。相应地,第一配置信息可以包括导频图案的指示信息和DMRS天线端口号的指示信息中的至少一项。In another optional combination of the subframe and the RE location, the subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information may be a reference signal (Demodulation Reference Signal, DMRS) for demodulation. One of the set of subframe information, the first RE indication information in the first configuration information may select one of a set of DMRS selectable symbol position locations. For example, the optional subframe information and the symbol position of the DMRS may refer to the 36.211 protocol, and may also refer to definitions in other protocols, which are not limited herein. Correspondingly, the first configuration information may include at least one of indication information of a pilot pattern and indication information of a DMRS antenna port number.
再一种具备兼容性的子帧和RE位置组合的可选方案中,第一配置信息中的第一RS的子帧信息可以为探测参考信号SRS可选的子帧信息的集合中的一种,第一配置信息中的第一RE指示信息可以选择SRS可选的符号位置位置的集合中的一种。SRS可选的子帧信息和符号位置具体可参考36.211协议,也可以参考其他协议中的定义。In another optional combination of the subframe and the RE location, the subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information may be one of a set of subframe information that is optional for the sounding reference signal SRS. The first RE indication information in the first configuration information may select one of a set of SRS selectable symbol position locations. The optional subframe information and symbol position of the SRS can be specifically referred to the 36.211 protocol, and can also refer to definitions in other protocols.
需要说明的是,当前协议中规定的SRS的子帧信息的定义方式包括子帧的周期和偏置,则本发明实施例的第一RS也可以采用SRS的可选的子帧信息发送,第一RS的子帧也可以包括子帧的周期和偏置。采用SRS的可选的子帧信息和符号位置发送,使得NE1在通知UE1时,可以采用当前协议中基站向UE通知SRS的流程,而不用新定义消息,UE也可以按照当前协议中的避开在SRS使用的子帧和RE上收发数据的方式,避开在第一RS使用的子帧和RE上收发数据。可选的,第一RS的子帧可以采用NE2指示NE2下的用户设备发送SRS的子帧,第一RE指示信息可以采用NE2指示NE2下的用户设备发送SRS使用的RE,例如,NE1可以使用NE2下的用户设备发送SRS的子帧和RE发送第一RS。在这种可选的方式中,NE1向NE2发送第一RS使用的子帧和RE,不会与NE2下的用户设备发送PUSCH占用相同的时频资源。可选的,NE1可以预先获取NE2下的用户发送SRS使用的子帧和RE,以确定可选的第一配置信息中的第一RS的子帧和第一RE指示信息。可选的,NE1可以不标明该子帧为发送SRS子帧,而仅按照发送SRS的方式在SRS的可选子帧以及可选的RE上发送第一RS。It should be noted that, the manner in which the subframe information of the SRS specified in the current protocol is defined includes the period and the offset of the subframe, and the first RS in the embodiment of the present invention may also use the optional subframe information of the SRS to be sent. The subframe of an RS may also include the period and offset of the subframe. The optional subframe information and the symbol position transmission of the SRS are used, so that when the UE1 is notified to the UE1, the procedure of the base station notifying the UE to the SRS in the current protocol may be adopted, instead of using the newly defined message, the UE may also avoid the current protocol. The method of transmitting and receiving data on the subframes and REs used by the SRS avoids transmitting and receiving data on the subframes and REs used by the first RS. Optionally, the subframe of the first RS may use the NE2 to indicate that the user equipment in the NE2 sends the SRS subframe, and the first RE indication information may use the NE2 to indicate that the user equipment under the NE2 sends the RE used by the SRS. For example, the NE1 may be used. The user equipment under the NE2 sends the SRS subframe and the RE sends the first RS. In this optional mode, the NE1 sends the subframe and the RE used by the first RS to the NE2, and does not use the same time-frequency resource that the user equipment under the NE2 sends the PUSCH. Optionally, the NE1 may pre-acquire the subframe and the RE used by the user in the S2 to send the SRS, and determine the subframe of the first RS and the first RE indication information in the optional first configuration information. Optionally, NE1 may not indicate that the subframe is a sending SRS subframe, but only send the first RS in an optional subframe of the SRS and an optional RE according to the manner of sending the SRS.
其中,若第一RS的子帧为发送SRS的可选的子帧信息集合中的任一种子帧信息,第一RE指示信息指示的第一RS占用的RE的符号为发送SRS的可选的符号位置集合中的任一种符号位置,则该第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧的相应符号的RE上包含的数据可以有几种情况:第一种情况:只包含所述第一RS,即不包含除了第一RS之外的信息;第二种情况:同时包含SRS信息和所述第一RS。If the subframe of the first RS is any one of the optional subframe information sets of the SRS, the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is optional for sending the SRS. For any one of the symbol position sets, the data included in the RE of the corresponding symbol of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS may have several cases: the first case: only the first RS, that is, does not include information other than the first RS; the second case: includes both SRS information and the first RS.
基于上述采用SRS的可选子帧上可选的RE发送第一RS的第二种情况,所述第一RS 与所述SRS信息可以位于不同的子载波上。采用第二种情况的方式,可以不影响现有SRS的发送流程,同时还可以充分利用发送SRS的子帧上的空闲的RE资源发送第一RS,减少对于UE的上行资源的浪费。The second case of transmitting the first RS based on the optional RE on the optional subframe using the SRS, the first RS The SRS information may be located on different subcarriers. In the second case, the sending process of the existing SRS may not be affected, and the first RS may be sent by using the idle RE resource in the subframe in which the SRS is sent, and the waste of the uplink resource for the UE is reduced.
基于上述采用SRS的可选子帧发送第一RS的第一种情况和第二种情况,第一RE指示信息指示的第一RS占用的RE还可以位于第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧的最后一个符号或者最后多个符号,例如一个或2个或3个,可参考图14。由于UE在最后一个符号上发送SRS采用梳齿状,第一RS可以使用空白区域发送,因此即使发送第一RS,也不会影响UE的SRS和上行数据的发送,仅SRS容量减小。The first case and the second case in which the first RS is sent by using the optional subframe of the SRS, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information may also be located in the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS. The last symbol of the frame or the last plurality of symbols, such as one or two or three, can be referred to FIG. Since the UE transmits the SRS on the last symbol in a comb shape, the first RS can be transmitted using the blank area, so even if the first RS is transmitted, the SRS and uplink data transmission of the UE are not affected, and only the SRS capacity is reduced.
可选的,基于第二种第一配置信息的可选的实施方式中的各种具体的实施方式,第一RS占用的子载波可以是间隔的子载波,这样的发送方式对于UE的上行数据的影响较小,举例来说,如果UE间隔1个子载波发送第一RS,则1个RB浪费6个子载波;如果UE间隔2个子载波发送第一RS,则1个RB浪费4个子载波;以此类推。Optionally, based on the specific implementation manners in the optional implementation manner of the second configuration information, the subcarriers occupied by the first RS may be interval subcarriers, and the sending manner is used for uplink data of the UE. The impact is small. For example, if the UE sends the first RS by 1 subcarrier, 1 RB wastes 6 subcarriers; if the UE sends the first RS by 2 subcarriers, 1 RB wastes 4 subcarriers; This type of push.
需要说明的是,若网络设备为TDD模式的基站,且工作频率相同,例如,NE1为eNB1,NE2为eNB2,工作频率均为f1,NE1通过小区1的天线发送第一RS,则NE1发送第一RS的时隙需要配置为下行时隙,NE2通过小区2的天线接收,NE2接收该第一RS的时隙需要配置为上行时隙。可参考图15为第一配置信息的一种可选的实施方式的场景示意图。It should be noted that, if the network device is a base station in the TDD mode and the working frequency is the same, for example, NE1 is eNB1, NE2 is eNB2, and the working frequency is f1, and NE1 sends the first RS through the antenna of the cell 1, then NE1 sends the first The time slot of an RS needs to be configured as a downlink time slot, and the NE2 receives the time slot of the cell 2, and the time slot in which the NE2 receives the first RS needs to be configured as an uplink time slot. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of an optional implementation manner of the first configuration information.
第三种第一配置信息的可选的实施方式中,第一配置信息中可以包括扰码,扰码用于NE1对第一RS进行加扰后发送。扰码除了提高第一RS的抗干扰能力之外,扰码还可以用做第一RS的标识,例如,当一个网络设备接收多个网络设备发送本发明实施例提供的参考信号时,即多个NE1向一个NE2发送第一RS,各个NE1可以用自身的设备标识作为扰码,则NE2可以根据扰码区分来自不同网络设备的第一RS,并且可以直接丢弃使用非预期的扰码加密的参考信号。可选的,扰码也可以是小区的标识,则NE2可以进一步区分通过NE1的不同CELL的天线端口发送的第一RS。In an optional implementation manner of the third configuration information, the first configuration information may include a scrambling code, where the scrambling code is used by the NE1 to perform scrambling on the first RS. The scrambling code can be used as the identifier of the first RS in addition to the anti-interference capability of the first RS. For example, when a network device receives a plurality of network devices and sends the reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present invention, NE1 sends a first RS to one NE2, and each NE1 can use its own device identifier as a scrambling code. NE2 can distinguish the first RS from different network devices according to the scrambling code, and can directly discard the encryption using unintended scrambling code. Reference signal. Optionally, the scrambling code may also be an identifier of the cell, and the NE2 may further distinguish the first RS sent by the antenna port of the different CELL of the NE1.
第四种第一配置信息的可选的实施方式,第一配置信息中还可以包括周期。即NE1周期性向所述NE2发送所述第一RS。In an optional implementation manner of the fourth configuration information, the first configuration information may further include a period. That is, NE1 periodically sends the first RS to the NE2.
基于第四种第一配置信息的可选的实施方式,当NE1还根据第五配置信息接收NE2发送的第二RS。其中,第五配置信息包括NE2发送第二RS的时频资源时,在上述各实施方式的基础上,本发明实施例还提供一种可选的参考信息的传输方法的可选的实施方式。本发明实施例提供的实施方式还包括:Based on an optional implementation manner of the fourth first configuration information, the NE1 further receives the second RS sent by the NE2 according to the fifth configuration information. When the fifth configuration information includes the time-frequency resource that the NE2 sends the second RS, the embodiment of the present invention further provides an optional implementation manner of the optional method for transmitting the reference information. The embodiments provided by the embodiments of the present invention further include:
NE1可以在第一RS的子帧信息向NE2发送第一RS,NE2在第二RS的子帧信息向NE1发送第二RS。The NE1 may send the first RS to the NE2 in the subframe information of the first RS, and the NE2 sends the second RS to the NE1 in the subframe information of the second RS.
其中,第一配置信息包括第一RS的子帧信息,第五配置信息包括第二RS的子帧信息。The first configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS, and the fifth configuration information includes subframe information of the second RS.
可选的,NE1在第一RS的子帧信息指示的子帧的下行时隙上发送第一RS,NE2在第一RS的子帧信息指示的子帧的上行时隙上发送第二RS。Optionally, the NE1 sends the first RS on the downlink time slot of the subframe indicated by the subframe information of the first RS, and the NE2 sends the second RS on the uplink time slot of the subframe indicated by the subframe information of the first RS.
其中,所述第一RS的子帧信息和所述第二RS的子帧信息的交集非空,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧的前段和后段分别包括上行时隙和下行时隙,或者,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧的前段和后段分别包括下行时隙和上行时隙。 The intersection of the subframe information of the first RS and the subframe information of the second RS is not empty, and the front and back segments of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS respectively include an uplink time slot and The downlink time slot, or the previous and subsequent segments of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS respectively include a downlink time slot and an uplink time slot.
可选的,NE1与NE2可以属于同一小区协作集,NE1可以周期性向NE2发送第一RS,NE2可以周期性的向NE1发送第二RS。Optionally, NE1 and NE2 may belong to the same cell cooperation set, and NE1 may periodically send the first RS to NE2, and NE2 may periodically send the second RS to NE1.
一种可选的实施方式中,可以规定,对于同一小区协作集中的各个小区归属的网络设备,在某一第n子帧时,标识cell ID为奇数的小区进为发送态,处于发送态的小区归属的NE发送第一RS,标识cell ID为偶数的小区为接收态,处于接收态的小区归属的NE接收第一RS,在下一个发送时刻,例如,第n+T个子帧时执行相反的操作,即标识cell ID为偶数的小区为发送态,发送态的小区归属的NE发送第一RS,标识cell ID为奇数的小区为接收态,接收态的小区归属的NE接收第一RS。即cell ID为奇数的小区归属的网络设备与cell ID为偶数的小区归属的网络设备可以分别采用NE1和NE2的RS的发送方法。可选的,也可以采用其他的划分方式区分发送态和接收态的小区或NE。In an optional implementation manner, it may be specified that, for a network device to which each cell in the same cell cooperation set belongs, in a certain nth subframe, the cell whose cell ID is an odd number is sent to be in a transmitting state, and is in a transmitting state. The NE to which the cell belongs sends the first RS, and the cell whose cell ID is even is the receiving state, and the NE that is in the receiving state receives the first RS, and performs the opposite at the next transmission time, for example, the n+Tth subframe. The operation, that is, the cell with the cell ID of the even number is the transmission state, the NE to which the cell in the transmitting state belongs is the first RS, the cell whose cell ID is an odd number is the receiving state, and the NE to which the cell in the receiving state belongs is the first RS. That is, the network device to which the cell with the cell ID is an odd number and the network device to which the cell with the even cell ID are assigned may adopt the method for transmitting the RS of NE1 and NE2, respectively. Optionally, other division manners may also be used to distinguish the cells or NEs in the transmit state and the receive state.
进一步的,T可以为发送第一RS的周期,第一配置信息可以包括第一RS的子帧信息,第五配置信息可以包括第二RS的子帧信息,第一RS的子帧信息包括第一RS的子帧的周期和偏置,所述第二RS的子帧信息包括第二RS的子帧的周期和偏置,所述第一RS的子帧的周期与第二RS的子帧的周期相同,所述第一RS的子帧的偏置与所述第二RS的子帧的偏置相隔一个周期。Further, the T may be a period in which the first RS is sent, the first configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS, and the fifth configuration information may include subframe information of the second RS, where the subframe information of the first RS includes a period and an offset of a subframe of the RS, the subframe information of the second RS includes a period and an offset of a subframe of the second RS, and a period of the subframe of the first RS and a subframe of the second RS The period of the subframe is the same, and the offset of the subframe of the first RS is separated from the offset of the subframe of the second RS by one cycle.
可选的,基站可以在同一个下行时隙发送RS,同时,第二小区协作集的基站在该时隙为上行时隙,则同时接收RS,到下一个周期可以反向发送,可参考图16为第一配置信息的又一种可选的实施方式的场景示意图。需要说明的是,NE1的周期可以与NE2的周期不同。Optionally, the base station may send the RS in the same downlink time slot, and the base station of the second cell cooperation set is the uplink time slot in the time slot, and receives the RS at the same time, and may send the reverse direction in the next cycle. 16 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of still another alternative embodiment of the first configuration information. It should be noted that the period of NE1 may be different from the period of NE2.
可选的,第五种第一配置信息的可选的实施方式,针对一个网络设备的不同天线端口,网络设备可以采用时分、频分、码分等复用时频资源的方式发送第一RS,以减少对UE上行资源或下行资源的浪费。Optionally, an optional implementation manner of the fifth first configuration information is that, for different antenna ports of one network device, the network device may send the first RS by multiplexing time-frequency resources, such as time division, frequency division, and code division. To reduce the waste of uplink resources or downlink resources of the UE.
可选的,第六种第一配置信息的可选的实施方式,针对一对多或者多对多的参考信号的传输场景,网络设备可以采用时分、频分、码分等复用时频资源的方式,以减少对UE上行资源或下行资源的浪费。Optionally, the optional implementation manner of the sixth first configuration information is that, for a one-to-many or many-to-many reference signal transmission scenario, the network device may use time division, frequency division, code division, etc. to reuse time-frequency resources. The way to reduce the waste of uplink resources or downlink resources of the UE.
在图1至图7所示方法的基础上,下面针对第二配置信息、第三配置信息、第四配置信息的关系进行说明。Based on the methods shown in FIGS. 1 to 7, the relationship between the second configuration information, the third configuration information, and the fourth configuration information will be described below.
其中,第二配置信息、第三配置信息、第四配置信息的内容可以分别是第一配置信息的子集,并且包含的内容可以不同,只需保证:根据第二配置信息可以确定出第一RS的发送的时频资源,以保证NE2能够接收到第一RS;以及,根据第三配置信息可以确定出与接收到该第三配置信息的UE可能发生冲突的时频资源,以保证接收到第三配置信息的UE不会误接收数据;以及,根据第四配置信息可以确定出与接收到该第四配置信息的UE可能发生冲突的时频资源,以保证接收到第四配置信息的UE不会误发送数据,进而不会影响NE2接收第一RS即可。The content of the second configuration information, the third configuration information, and the fourth configuration information may be respectively a subset of the first configuration information, and the content included may be different, and only the first configuration information may be determined according to the second configuration information. The time-frequency resource of the RS is transmitted to ensure that the NE2 can receive the first RS; and, according to the third configuration information, the time-frequency resource that may collide with the UE that receives the third configuration information may be determined to ensure that the time-frequency resource may be received. The UE of the third configuration information does not receive the data by mistake; and, according to the fourth configuration information, the time-frequency resource that may collide with the UE that receives the fourth configuration information may be determined to ensure that the UE that receives the fourth configuration information is received. The data will not be sent by mistake, and thus will not affect the NE2 receiving the first RS.
在上述各种实施方式的基础上,本发明实施例提供几种第二配置信息、第三配置信息、第四配置信息的可选的实施方式。On the basis of the foregoing various embodiments, the embodiment of the present invention provides several optional implementations of the second configuration information, the third configuration information, and the fourth configuration information.
可选的,在S101NE1根据第一配置信息向NE2发送第一RS之前,NE1向NE2发送第二配置信息,第二配置信息可以包括第一配置信息中的第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第二RE指示信息; Optionally, before S101NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2 according to the first configuration information, the NE1 sends the second configuration information to the NE2, where the second configuration information may include the subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information, and/ Or, the second RE indicates information;
其中,第二RE指示信息可以包括:所述第一配置信息中的第一RE指示信息,或者,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号,或者,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波,或者,所述NE1发送所述第一RS使用的各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识。The second RE indication information may include: a first RE indication information in the first configuration information, or a symbol in which the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is located, or The sub-carrier in which the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is located, or the NE1 sends a type indication identifier of a pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port used by the first RS.
可选的,可以在NE1向UE1发送下行数据之前,NE1向UE1发送第三配置信息。所述第三配置信息可以包括所述第一配置信息的第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第三RE指示信息;Optionally, before the NE1 sends the downlink data to the UE1, the NE1 sends the third configuration information to the UE1. The third configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS of the first configuration information, and/or third RE indication information;
其中,所述第三RE指示信息包括:所述第一RE指示信息,或者,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号,或者,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波,或者,所述NE1的各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识。The third RE indication information includes: the first RE indication information, or the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information, or the first RE indication The subcarriers in which the REs occupied by the first RS are indicated by the information, or the type indication identifiers of the pilot patterns corresponding to the respective antenna ports of the NE1.
类似的,第四配置信息可以包括所述第一配置信息中的第一RS的子帧信息,和,第四RE指示信息;Similarly, the fourth configuration information may include subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information, and fourth RE indication information;
其中,所述第四RE指示信息包括:所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE,或者,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号,或者,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波,或者,所述CELL1的各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识。The fourth RE indication information includes: an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information, or an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information. The symbol, or the sub-carrier in which the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is located, or the type indication identifier of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port of the CELL1.
可选的,NE2可以通过资源块配置Resource Block Assignment消息向UE2发送第四配置信息。Optionally, the NE2 may send the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using a resource block configuration Resource Block Assignment message.
在图1至图7所示方法的基础上,需要说明的是,本发明实施例还提供四类网络设备发送第三配置信息和第四配置信息的新的消息格式,本发明实施例的第三配置信息和第四配置信息可以采用下面的消息格式中的至少一种消息进行发送。On the basis of the methods shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 7 , it is to be noted that the embodiment of the present invention further provides a new message format in which the fourth type network device sends the third configuration information and the fourth configuration information, which is the first embodiment of the present invention. The three configuration information and the fourth configuration information may be sent using at least one of the following message formats.
第一RS可以称为小区间(cell to cell,简称C2C)参考信号。小区间参考信号的配置和新增信元格式如下。The first RS may be referred to as a cell to cell (C2C) reference signal. The configuration of the small-area reference signal and the new cell format are as follows.
第一类新增的消息格式为RRC信令中的新增信元。其中,新增的小区间参考信号的配置信息中可以包括第一RS的周期、时频资源、天线端口数量等。The first type of new message format is the new cell in RRC signaling. The configuration information of the newly added inter-cell reference signal may include a period of the first RS, a time-frequency resource, a number of antenna ports, and the like.
–C2C-RS-Config–C2C-RS-Config
Figure PCTCN2017085682-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2017085682-appb-000001
第二类新增的消息格式为广播消息中的新增信元。新的广播消息的消息格式中可以包 括第一RS的周期、时频资源、天线端口数量等。广播消息可以通过PBCH发送。The second type of new message format is the new cell in the broadcast message. The new broadcast message can be packaged in the message format. The period of the first RS, the time-frequency resource, the number of antenna ports, and the like. Broadcast messages can be sent over the PBCH.
例如,MIB消息中新增的信元如下所示:For example, the new cells in the MIB message are as follows:
MasterInformationBlockMasterInformationBlock
Figure PCTCN2017085682-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2017085682-appb-000002
第三类新增的消息格式为物理层信令中的新增信元。新的物理层信令的消息格式包括两种,第一种物理层信令用于指示下行数据的可用时频资源。其中,DCI中可以增加C2C RS的配置指示,标志位C2C RS indicator用于指示第一RS占用的RE位置,该标志位的枚举值可以对应一个或多个导频图案,可选的,该标志位可以携带前述的导频图案的类型指示标识,例如,可以是参考信号类型或者天线端口数或者天线端口号或者一个导频图案的索引中一种或多种组合等。具体是在DCI中增加如下信息:The third type of new message format is the new cell in the physical layer signaling. The message format of the new physical layer signaling includes two types, and the first physical layer signaling is used to indicate the available time-frequency resources of the downlink data. The configuration of the C2C RS may be added to the DCI. The flag bit C2C RS indicator is used to indicate the RE position occupied by the first RS. The enumerated value of the flag bit may correspond to one or more pilot patterns. Optionally, the The flag bit may carry the type indication identifier of the foregoing pilot pattern, for example, may be a reference signal type or an antenna port number or an antenna port number or an index of one pilot pattern, or the like. Specifically, add the following information to DCI:
-Resource block assignment:-Resource block assignment:
-For resource allocation type 0as defined in section 7.1.6.1of[3]-For resource allocation type 0as defined in section 7.1.6.1of[3]
-bits provide the resource allocation-bits provide the resource allocation
-For resource allocation type 1as defined in section 7.1.6.2of[3]-For resource allocation type 1as defined in section 7.1.6.2of[3]
-bits of this field are used as a header specific to this resource allocation type to indicate the selected resource blocks subset-bits of this field are used as a header specific to this resource allocation type to indicate the selected resource blocks subset
-1bit indicates a shift of the resource allocation span-1bit indicates a shift of the resource allocation span
-bits provide the resource allocation-bits provide the resource allocation
where the value of P depends on the number of DL resource blocks as indicated in section[7.1.6.1]of[3]Where the value of P depends on the number of DL resource blocks as indicated in section[7.1.6.1]of[3]
-for C2C RS indicator—0or 1/2/3bits-for C2C RS indicator—0or 1/2/3bits
第二种物理层信令用于指示上行数据的可用时频资源。其中,DCI中可以增加C2C RS的配置指示,标志位CSC RS symbol indicator可以仅指示第一RS占用的符号。具体是在DCI中增加如下信息:The second physical layer signaling is used to indicate available time-frequency resources of the uplink data. The configuration indication of the C2C RS may be added in the DCI, and the flag CSC RS symbol indicator may only indicate the symbol occupied by the first RS. Specifically, add the following information to DCI:
-Resource block assignment:-Resource block assignment:
-For resource allocation type 0as defined in section 7.1.6.1of[3]-For resource allocation type 0as defined in section 7.1.6.1of[3]
-bits provide the resource allocation -bits provide the resource allocation
-For resource allocation type 1as defined in section 7.1.6.2of[3]-For resource allocation type 1as defined in section 7.1.6.2of[3]
-bits of this field are used as a header specific to this resource allocation type to indicate the selected resource blocks subset-bits of this field are used as a header specific to this resource allocation type to indicate the selected resource blocks subset
-1bit indicates a shift of the resource allocation span-1bit indicates a shift of the resource allocation span
-bits provide the resource allocation-bits provide the resource allocation
where the value of P depends on the number of DL resource blocks as indicated in section[7.1.6.1]of[3]Where the value of P depends on the number of DL resource blocks as indicated in section[7.1.6.1]of[3]
-for C2C RS symbol indicator—0or 1/2bits-for C2C RS symbol indicator—0or 1/2bits
可选的,采用上述各种节省消息开销的第二配置信息、第三配置信息、第四配置信息的发送方式,例如,间隔子载波发送第一RS,又如,与SRS共用子帧,再如通过共用时隙实现交互网络设备的小区间参考信号的发送,能够提高网络设备的传输码率。具体的,码率的计算公式为:Optionally, the foregoing, where the second configuration information, the third configuration information, and the fourth configuration information are saved, for example, the interval subcarrier sends the first RS, and, for example, shares the subframe with the SRS, and then If the inter-cell reference signal of the interactive network device is transmitted through the shared time slot, the transmission code rate of the network device can be improved. Specifically, the formula for calculating the code rate is:
码率=(可用RE*调制方式-CRC校验码)/tbsize(传输的信息bit)Code rate = (available RE* modulation method - CRC check code) / tbsize (transmitted information bit)
由此可见,当采用本发明实施例提供的各种节省占用的RE数量的第一配置信息的实施方式,能够提升网络设备的传输码率。It can be seen that, when the implementation manner of the first configuration information of the number of occupied REs provided by the embodiment of the present invention is adopted, the transmission code rate of the network device can be improved.
在图2所示的方法的基础上,本发明实施例还提供四种NE1向NE2发送第一RS的可选的实施方式。On the basis of the method shown in FIG. 2, the embodiment of the present invention further provides four optional embodiments in which the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2.
需要说明的是,NE1可以通过数字波束、模拟波束向NE2发送第一RS。It should be noted that NE1 can send the first RS to NE2 through the digital beam and the analog beam.
第一种可选的第一RS的发送方式中,若所述NE1用数字波束的形式向所述UE1发送第一下行数据,则NE1向所述NE2发送第一RS,可以具体包括:所述NE1采用非波束的形式向所述NE2发送所述第一RS;In the first optional first RS transmission mode, if the NE1 sends the first downlink data to the UE1 in the form of a digital beam, the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2, which may specifically include: The NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2 in a non-beam form;
所述NE1向所述NE2发送第一下行数据和第一下行数据的调度结果,可以具体包括:NE1将所述第一下行数据的预编码矩阵发送给所述NE2,以使所述NE2根据所述采用非波束的形式发送的第一RS得到未预编码的所述第一信道,并根据未预编码的所述第一信道、所述第一下行数据的预编码矩阵和所述第一下行数据的调度结果还原所述第一干扰信号。The sending, by the NE1, the scheduling result of the first downlink data and the first downlink data to the NE2, the method may include: sending, by the NE1, the precoding matrix of the first downlink data to the NE2, so that the The NE2 obtains the first channel that is not precoded according to the first RS that is sent in the form of a non-beam, and according to the first channel that is not precoded, the precoding matrix of the first downlink data, and the The scheduling result of the first downlink data restores the first interference signal.
其中,第一下行数据可以为未编码的也可以为编码后的,若第一下行数据为未编码的,则需要将预编码矩阵也发送给NE2。The first downlink data may be uncoded or encoded. If the first downlink data is uncoded, the precoding matrix needs to be sent to the NE2.
第二种可选的第一RS的发送方式中,若所述NE1采用模拟波束的形式向所述UE2发送第一下行数据,则NE1向NE2发送第一RS,可以具体包括:所述NE1用模拟波束的形式向所述NE2发送所述第一RS。In the second optional first RS transmission mode, if the NE1 sends the first downlink data to the UE2 in the form of an analog beam, the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2, which may specifically include: the NE1. The first RS is transmitted to the NE2 in the form of an analog beam.
第三种可选的第一RS的发送方式中,若所述NE1采用数字波束的形式向所述UE2发送第一下行数据,则所述NE1向NE2发送第一RS,可以具体包括:所述NE1用数字波束的形式向所述NE2发送所述第一RS。In the third optional first RS transmission mode, if the NE1 sends the first downlink data to the UE2 in the form of a digital beam, the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2, which may specifically include: The NE1 transmits the first RS to the NE2 in the form of a digital beam.
第四种可选的第一RS的发送方式中,若所述NE1用数字波束的形式向所述UE2发送第一下行数据,则In the fourth optional first RS transmission mode, if the NE1 sends the first downlink data to the UE2 in the form of a digital beam,
所述NE1向的NE2发送第一RS,具体包括:所述NE1采用数字波束的形式向所述NE2发送所述第一RS; The NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2, and the NE1 sends the first RS to the NE2 in the form of a digital beam.
所述NE1向所述NE2发送第一下行数据和第一下行数据的调度结果,具体包括:The sending, by the NE1, the scheduling result of the first downlink data and the first downlink data to the NE2, specifically includes:
所述NE1向所述NE2发送数字波束形式的第一下行数据和第一下行数据的调度结果。The NE1 sends the first downlink data in the form of a digital beam and the scheduling result of the first downlink data to the NE2.
图17为本发明实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图。FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
如图17所示,本发明实施例提供的网络设备可以作为第一网络设备NE1,所述NE1可以包括:As shown in FIG. 17, the network device provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be used as the first network device NE1, and the NE1 may include:
第一收发模块11,用于第一小区CELL1所属的所述NE1根据第一配置信息向第二小区CELL2所属的第二网络设备NE2发送第一参考信号RS;所述第一配置信息包括用于指示所述NE1发送所述第一RS时使用的时频资源的信息。The first transceiver module 11 is configured to send, by using the first configuration information, the first reference signal RS to the second network device NE2 to which the second cell CELL2 belongs according to the first configuration information; the first configuration information includes And indicating information about a time-frequency resource used by the NE1 to send the first RS.
其中,所述第一RS用于所述NE2根据所述第一RS消除所述NE1对第一上行数据的干扰,所述第一上行数据来自所述NE2下的用户设备。The first RS is used by the NE2 to cancel the interference of the NE1 on the first uplink data according to the first RS, where the first uplink data is from a user equipment under the NE2.
可选的,所述NE1还包括:Optionally, the NE1 further includes:
处理模块12,用于检测到所述CELL1与所述CELL2的上下行子帧配比不一致。The processing module 12 is configured to detect that the ratio of the uplink and downlink subframes of the CELL1 and the CELL2 is inconsistent.
可选的,所述NE1还可以包括:Optionally, the NE1 may further include:
第二收发模块13,用于向所述NE2发送第一下行数据和/或第一下行数据的调度结果;所述第一下行数据为所述NE1发送给所述NE1的第一小区CELL1服务的用户设备的。The second transceiver module 13 is configured to send, to the NE2, a scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data, where the first downlink data is sent by the NE1 to the first cell of the NE1 CELL1 serves the user's device.
可选的,所述第二收发模块13,可以用于通过所述NE1与所述NE2之间的X2接口向所述NE2发送所述第一下行数据和/或所述第一下行数据的调度结果。Optionally, the second transceiver module 13 may be configured to send the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data to the NE2 by using an X2 interface between the NE1 and the NE2. Scheduling results.
可选的,所述第一配置信息包括:Optionally, the first configuration information includes:
所述第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,Subframe information of the first RS, and/or,
第一资源单元RE指示信息,所述第一RE指示信息用于指示所述第一RS占用的RE。The first resource unit RE indicates information, and the first RE indication information is used to indicate an RE occupied by the first RS.
可选的,所述NE1的第一小区包括至少一个天线端口,则所述第一RE指示信息包括:Optionally, the first cell of the NE1 includes at least one antenna port, and the first RE indication information includes:
与所述CELL1的各个天线端口对应的导频图案,所述导频图案用于指示所述第一小区的各个天线端口发送所述第一RS的RE。And a pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port of the CELL1, where the pilot pattern is used to indicate that each antenna port of the first cell sends the RE of the first RS.
可选的,所述NE1的各个天线端口对应的导频图案中的至少一种属于信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS可选的导频图案集合。Optionally, at least one of the pilot patterns corresponding to the antenna ports of the NE1 belongs to a channel pattern information reference signal CSI-RS selectable pilot pattern set.
可选的,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧属于NE2的探测参考信号SRS可选的子帧的集合。Optionally, the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS belongs to a set of selectable subframes of the sounding reference signal SRS of the NE2.
可选的,第一RE指示信息指示的第一RS占用的RE与NE2下的SRS使用的RE不同;和/或;第一RE指示信息指示的第一RS占用的RE与NE2下的SRS使用的RE所在的子载波不同;和/或;第一RE指示信息指示的第一RS占用的RE与NE2下的SRS使用的RE所在的符号不同。Optionally, the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is different from the RE used by the SRS under the NE2; and/or; the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information and the SRS used by the NE2 The subcarriers in which the REs are located are different; and/or; the REs occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information are different from the symbols of the REs used by the SRSs under the NE2.
可选的,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号为所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧的最后一个符号。Optionally, the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is the last symbol of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS.
可选的,所述第一RS的子帧信息为专用子帧,所述专用子帧承载所述第一RS。Optionally, the subframe information of the first RS is a dedicated subframe, and the dedicated subframe carries the first RS.
可选的,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧中可以只包含所述第一RS,或者,Optionally, the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS may include only the first RS, or
所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧中可以包含所述第一RS和物理下行控制信道PDCCH信息,或者包含所述第一RS和CRS信息,或者包含所述第一RS和PDCCH信息和CRS信息。The subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS may include the first RS and physical downlink control channel PDCCH information, or include the first RS and CRS information, or include the first RS and PDCCH information. And CRS information.
可选的,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧中同时包含所述第一RS与所述PDCCH 信息,所述PDCCH信息位于第1至第4个符号。Optionally, the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS includes the first RS and the PDCCH in a subframe. Information, the PDCCH information is located in the first to fourth symbols.
可选的,所述第一配置信息还包括扰码,所述扰码用于所述NE1对所述第一RS进行加扰。Optionally, the first configuration information further includes a scrambling code, where the scrambling code is used by the NE1 to scramble the first RS.
可选的,所述第二收发模块13,还用于向所述NE2发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息包括所述第一配置信息中的第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第二RE指示信息;Optionally, the second transceiver module 13 is further configured to send the second configuration information to the NE2, where the second configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information, and Or, the second RE indicates information;
其中,所述第二RE指示信息包括:所述第一配置信息中的第一RE指示信息,或者,The second RE indication information includes: the first RE indication information in the first configuration information, or
所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号与所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波与所述NE1发送所述第一RS使用的各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识三项中至少一项。Transmitting, by the first RE indication information, the symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS and the subcarrier where the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is sent by the NE1 The type of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port used by an RS indicates at least one of the three items.
可选的,所述处理模块14,还用于根据所述第一配置信息,确定向由所述第一小区服务的第一用户设备UE1发送下行数据时可用的时频资源。Optionally, the processing module 14 is further configured to determine, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the downlink data is sent to the first user equipment UE1 served by the first cell.
所述第一收发模块11,还用于向UE1发送第三配置信息。The first transceiver module 11 is further configured to send third configuration information to the UE1.
所述第三配置信息包括所述第一配置信息的第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第三RE指示信息;The third configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS of the first configuration information, and/or third RE indication information;
其中,所述第三RE指示信息包括:所述第一RE指示信息,或者,The third RE indication information includes: the first RE indication information, or,
所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号与所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波与所述NE1的各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识三项中至少一项。a symbol in which the RE of the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is located, and a subcarrier where the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is located, and each antenna port of the NE1 The type of the corresponding pilot pattern indicates at least one of the three items.
可选的,所述第一收发模块11具体用于通过广播消息和/或UE专用信息发送所述第三配置信息。可选的,所述第一收发模块11具体用于通过高层信令和/或物理层信令发送所述第三配置信息。可选的,所述高层信令包括无线资源控制RRC消息。可选的,所述RRC消息包括主系统信息块MIB消息,或者,系统信息块SIB消息。可选的,所述物理层信令包括数据控制指示信息DCI。Optionally, the first transceiver module 11 is specifically configured to send the third configuration information by using a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information. Optionally, the first transceiver module 11 is specifically configured to send the third configuration information by using high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling. Optionally, the high layer signaling includes a radio resource control RRC message. Optionally, the RRC message includes a primary system information block MIB message, or a system information block SIB message. Optionally, the physical layer signaling includes data control indication information DCI.
可选的,所述第三配置信息包括所述第三RE指示信息,且所述第三RE指示的所述第一RS占用的RE与所述UE1的物理下行共享信道PDSCH的RE重叠;Optionally, the third configuration information includes the third RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE overlaps with the RE of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH of the UE1;
则所述第一收发模块11具体用于通过UE专用信息向所述UE1发送所述第三配置信息,所述第三配置信息包括第三RE指示信息,所述第三RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS与所述UE1的PDSCH冲突的RE为,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE与所述UE1的PDSCH的交集。The first transceiver module 11 is specifically configured to send the third configuration information to the UE1 by using UE-specific information, where the third configuration information includes third RE indication information, where the third RE indication information indicates The RE that conflicts with the PDSCH of the UE1 by the first RS indicates that the first RE indicates the intersection of the RE occupied by the first RS and the PDSCH of the UE1.
可选的,所述第三配置信息包括所述第一RS的子帧信息和所述第三RE指示信息,所述第一收发模块11具体用于通过广播消息向所述UE1发送所述第三配置信息中的所述第一RS的子帧信息;所述第一收发模块11还具体用于通过UE专用信息向所述UE1发送所述第三配置信息中的所述第三RE指示信息。Optionally, the third configuration information includes the subframe information of the first RS and the third RE indication information, where the first transceiver module 11 is specifically configured to send the first message to the UE1 by using a broadcast message. And the first transceiver module 11 is further configured to send the third RE indication information in the third configuration information to the UE1 by using UE-specific information. .
可选的,所述所述第一收发模块11还用于,根据第五配置信息接收所述NE2发送的第二RS,所述第五配置信息包括所述NE2发送所述第二RS的时频资源。Optionally, the first transceiver module 11 is further configured to receive, according to the fifth configuration information, the second RS that is sent by the NE2, where the fifth configuration information includes, when the NE2 sends the second RS Frequency resources.
可选的,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一RS的子帧信息,所述第五配置信息包括所述第二RS的子帧信息,Optionally, the first configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS, and the fifth configuration information includes subframe information of the second RS, where
所述第一收发模块11还用于在所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧上发送所述第一RS, The first transceiver module 11 is further configured to send the first RS on a subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS, where
所述第一收发模块11还用于在所述第二RS的子帧信息确定的子帧上接收所述第二RS。The first transceiver module 11 is further configured to receive the second RS on a subframe determined by the subframe information of the second RS.
可选的,所述第一RS的子帧信息和所述第二RS的子帧信息确定的子帧的交集非空,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧的前段和后段分别包括上行时隙和下行时隙,或者,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧的前段和后段分别包括下行时隙和上行时隙;Optionally, the intersection of the subframe information determined by the subframe information of the first RS and the subframe information of the second RS is not empty, and the preceding and following segments of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS are The uplink time slot and the downlink time slot are respectively included, or the first and the last segments of the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS respectively include a downlink time slot and an uplink time slot;
则所述第一收发模块11还用于在所述第一RS的子帧信息指示的子帧的下行时隙上发送所述第一RS,并在所述第一RS的子帧信息指示的子帧的上行时隙上接收所述第二RS。The first transceiver module 11 is further configured to send the first RS on a downlink time slot of a subframe indicated by the subframe information of the first RS, and indicate the subframe information in the first RS. The second RS is received on an uplink time slot of a subframe.
可选的,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一RS的子帧信息,所述第五配置信息包括所述第二RS的子帧信息,所述第一RS的子帧信息包括第一RS的子帧的周期和偏置,所述第二RS的子帧信息包括第二RS的子帧的周期和偏置,所述第一RS的子帧的周期与第二RS的子帧的周期相同,所述第一RS的子帧的偏置与所述第二RS的子帧的偏置相隔一个周期;Optionally, the first configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS, the fifth configuration information includes subframe information of the second RS, and the subframe information of the first RS includes the first The period and the offset of the subframe of the RS, the subframe information of the second RS includes the period and the offset of the subframe of the second RS, and the period of the subframe of the first RS and the subframe of the second RS The period is the same, the offset of the subframe of the first RS is separated from the offset of the subframe of the second RS by one cycle;
所述第一收发模块还用于周期性向所述NE2发送所述第一RS,并周期性的接收所述NE2发送的所述第二RS。The first transceiver module is further configured to periodically send the first RS to the NE2, and periodically receive the second RS sent by the NE2.
可选的,所述第一收发模块11通过CELL1的各个天线端口接收所述NE2的CELL2的各个天线端口发送的所述第二RS,Optionally, the first transceiver module 11 receives the second RS sent by each antenna port of the CELL2 of the NE2 through each antenna port of the CELL1.
所述第二RS的子帧信息为所述NE2根据所述CELL2的小区标识确定的。The subframe information of the second RS is determined by the NE2 according to the cell identifier of the CELL2.
可选的,所述CELL2的小区标识为偶数,所述CELL1的小区标识为奇数,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧为第一子帧,所述第二RS的子帧信息确定的子帧为第二子帧,所述第二子帧为所述第一子帧之后间隔一个所述第一RS的子帧的周期的子帧;或者,Optionally, the cell identifier of the CELL2 is an even number, and the cell identifier of the CELL1 is an odd number, and the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS is a first subframe, and the subframe information of the second RS is The determined subframe is a second subframe, and the second subframe is a subframe of a period of one subframe of the first RS after the first subframe; or
所述CELL2的小区标识为奇数,所述CELL1的小区标识为偶数,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧为第一子帧,所述第二RS的子帧信息确定的子帧为第二子帧,所述第二子帧为所述第一子帧之后间隔一个所述第一RS的子帧的周期的子帧。The cell identifier of the CELL2 is an odd number, and the cell identifier of the CELL1 is an even number. The subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS is a first subframe, and the subframe determined by the subframe information of the second RS is a subframe. For the second subframe, the second subframe is a subframe of a period of one subframe of the first RS after the first subframe.
可选的,所述第一收发模块11用于通过CELL1的各个天线端口向所述NE2的CELL2的各个天线端口发送所述第一RS,Optionally, the first transceiver module 11 is configured to send the first RS to each antenna port of the CELL2 of the NE2 through each antenna port of the CELL1.
所述第一RS的子帧信息为所述NE1根据所述CELL1的小区标识确定的。The subframe information of the first RS is determined by the NE1 according to the cell identifier of the CELL1.
可选的,所述CELL1和所述CELL2属于一个小区协作集。Optionally, the CELL1 and the CELL2 belong to a cell cooperation set.
本实施例的网络设备,可以用于执行图1至图16所示方法实施例的技术方案,其实现原理和技术效果类似,此处不再赘述。The network device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 16 , and the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图18为本发明实施例提供的又一种网络设备的结构示意图。FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of still another network device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
如图18所示,本发明实施例提供的网络设备可以作为第二网络设备NE2,所述NE2可以包括:As shown in FIG. 18, the network device provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be used as the second network device NE2, and the NE2 may include:
第一收发模块21,用于第二小区CELL2归属的所述NE2根据第一配置信息接收第一小区CELL1归属的第一网络设备NE1发送的第一参考信号RS,所述第一配置信息包括用于指示所述NE1发送所述第一RS所使用的时频资源的信息。The first transceiver module 21, the NE2 that is used by the second cell CELL2 to receive the first reference signal RS sent by the first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs according to the first configuration information, where the first configuration information includes And indicating information that the NE1 sends the time-frequency resource used by the first RS.
可选的,所述NE2还可以包括处理模块22,用于根据所述第一RS消除所述NE1对第一上行数据的干扰,所述第一上行数据来自所述NE2下的用户设备。Optionally, the NE2 may further include a processing module 22, configured to remove interference of the NE1 on the first uplink data according to the first RS, where the first uplink data is from a user equipment under the NE2.
可选的,所述处理模块22可以用于,根据所述第一RS得到所述NE1与所述NE2之间的第一信道; Optionally, the processing module 22 is configured to obtain, according to the first RS, a first channel between the NE1 and the NE2;
根据所述第一信道得到第一干扰信号;Obtaining a first interference signal according to the first channel;
根据所述第一干扰信号解调第一上行数据。Demodulating the first uplink data according to the first interference signal.
可选的,所述NE2可以包括第二收发模块13,用于接收所述NE1发送的第一下行数据和/或第一下行数据的调度结果,所述第一下行数据为所述NE1发送给所述NE1下的用户设备的;Optionally, the NE2 may include a second transceiver module 13 configured to receive a scheduling result of the first downlink data and/or the first downlink data sent by the NE1, where the first downlink data is the NE1 is sent to the user equipment under the NE1;
则所述处理模块具体用于根据所述第一下行数据和所述第一下行数据的调度结果中至少一项和所述第一信道还原所述第一干扰信号。The processing module is specifically configured to restore the first interference signal according to at least one of the first downlink data and the scheduling result of the first downlink data, and the first channel.
可选的,所述第二收发模块23具体用于通过所述NE2与所述NE1之间的X2接口接收所述第一下行数据和第一下行数据的调度结果。Optionally, the second transceiver module 23 is configured to receive, by using an X2 interface between the NE2 and the NE1, a scheduling result of the first downlink data and the first downlink data.
可选的,所述第一配置信息包括:Optionally, the first configuration information includes:
所述第一RS的子帧信息,和,The subframe information of the first RS, and,
第一资源单元RE指示信息,所述第一RE指示信息用于指示所述第一RS占用的RE。The first resource unit RE indicates information, and the first RE indication information is used to indicate an RE occupied by the first RS.
可选的,所述第二收发模块23,还用于接收所述NE1发送的第二配置信息;所述第二配置信息包括所述第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第二RE指示信息;Optionally, the second transceiver module 23 is further configured to receive second configuration information that is sent by the NE1, where the second configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS, and/or a second RE Indication information;
其中,所述第二RE指示信息包括:所述第一RS的RE位置,或者,所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号与所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波与所述CELL1发送所述第一RS使用的各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识三项中至少一项;The second RE indication information includes: an RE location of the first RS, or a symbol in which the RE occupied by the first RS is located and a subcarrier where the RE occupied by the first RS is located, and the CELL1 Sending, by the type of the pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port used by the first RS, at least one of the three items;
所述处理模块22,还用于根据所述第二配置信息确定所述第一配置信息。The processing module 22 is further configured to determine the first configuration information according to the second configuration information.
可选的,所述处理模块22,还用于根据所述第一配置信息,确定分配给由所述CELL2服务的第二用户设备UE2发送上行数据时可用的时频资源。Optionally, the processing module 22 is further configured to determine, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the second user equipment UE2 served by the CELL2 sends uplink data.
可选的,所述所述第一收发模块21,还用于向UE2发送第四配置信息。Optionally, the first transceiver module 21 is further configured to send fourth configuration information to the UE2.
可选的,所述第四配置信息包括所述第一配置信息中的第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第四RE指示信息;Optionally, the fourth configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information, and/or fourth RE indication information;
其中,所述第四RE指示信息包括:所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE,或者,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号,或者,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波,或者,所述CELL1的各个天线端口对应的导频图案的类型指示标识中至少一项。The fourth RE indication information includes: an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information, or an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information. And a symbol, or a subcarrier in which the RE of the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is located, or at least one of a type indication identifier of a pilot pattern corresponding to each antenna port of the CELL1.
可选的,所述第一收发模块21具体用于通过广播消息和/或UE专用信息发送所述第三配置信息。可选的,所述第一收发模块21具体用于通过高层信令和/或物理层信令发送所述第三配置信息。可选的,所述高层信令包括无线资源控制RRC消息。可选的,所述RRC消息包括主系统信息块MIB消息,或者,系统信息块SIB消息。可选的,所述物理层信令包括数据控制指示信息DCI。Optionally, the first transceiver module 21 is specifically configured to send the third configuration information by using a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information. Optionally, the first transceiver module 21 is specifically configured to send the third configuration information by using high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling. Optionally, the high layer signaling includes a radio resource control RRC message. Optionally, the RRC message includes a primary system information block MIB message, or a system information block SIB message. Optionally, the physical layer signaling includes data control indication information DCI.
可选的,所述第一配置信息包括第一RE指示信息,且所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE与所述UE2的物理上行共享信道PUSCH的RE重叠;Optionally, the first configuration information includes the first RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information overlaps with the RE of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH of the UE2;
则所述第一收发模块21还用于通过UE专用信息向所述UE2发送所述第四配置信息,所述第四配置信息包括第四RE指示信息,所述第四RE指示信息指示的与所述第一RS占用的RE冲突的PUSCH的RE位置为,所述第一RE指示信息指示的RE位置与所述UE2的PUSCH的交集。The first transceiver module 21 is further configured to send the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using UE-specific information, where the fourth configuration information includes fourth RE indication information, and the fourth RE indication information indicates The RE location of the PUSCH in which the RE of the first RS is occupied by the first RS indicates the intersection of the RE location indicated by the first RE indication information and the PUSCH of the UE2.
可选的,所述第四配置信息包括所述第一RS的子帧和所述第四RE指示信息,所述 第一收发模块21具体用于通过广播消息向所述UE2发送所述第四配置信息中的所述第一RS的子帧信息;Optionally, the fourth configuration information includes a subframe of the first RS and the fourth RE indication information, where The first transceiver module 21 is configured to send the subframe information of the first RS in the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using a broadcast message.
所述第一收发模块21具体用于通过UE专用信息向所述UE2发送所述第四配置信息中的所述第四RE指示信息。The first transceiver module 21 is specifically configured to send the fourth RE indication information in the fourth configuration information to the UE2 by using UE-specific information.
本实施例的网络设备,可以用于执行图1至图16所示方法实施例的技术方案,其实现原理和技术效果类似,此处不再赘述。The network device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 16 , and the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图19为本发明实施例提供的一种用户设备的结构示意图。FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
如图19所示,本发明实施例提供的用户设备可以包括:As shown in FIG. 19, the user equipment provided by the embodiment of the present invention may include:
处理模块32,用于根据第三配置信息确定接收数据或者发送数据时可用的时频资源。The processing module 32 is configured to determine, according to the third configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when receiving data or transmitting data.
其中,所述第三配置信息用于指示第一参考信号RS占用的全部或者部分时频资源,所述第一RS为第一小区CELL1归属的第一网络设备NE1向第二小区CELL2归属的第二网络设备NE2发送的。The third configuration information is used to indicate all or part of the time-frequency resources occupied by the first reference signal RS, where the first RS is the first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs to the second cell CELL2. Two network devices sent by NE2.
可选的,所述用户设备还可以包括:Optionally, the user equipment may further include:
收发模块31,用于接收所述第三配置信息。The transceiver module 31 is configured to receive the third configuration information.
可选的,所述收发模块31用于接收广播消息和/或UE专用信息,所述广播消息和/或UE专用信息包含所述第三配置信息。Optionally, the transceiver module 31 is configured to receive a broadcast message and/or UE-specific information, where the broadcast message and/or the UE-specific information includes the third configuration information.
可选的,所述收发模块31用于接收高层信令和/或物理层信令,所述高层信令和/或物理层信令包含所述第三配置信息。可选的,所述高层信令包括无线资源控制RRC消息。可选的,所述RRC消息包括主系统信息块MIB消息,或者,系统信息块SIB消息。可选的,所述物理层信令包括数据控制指示信息DCI。可选的,所述第三配置信息包括所述第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第三RE指示信息,Optionally, the transceiver module 31 is configured to receive high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling, where the high layer signaling and/or physical layer signaling includes the third configuration information. Optionally, the high layer signaling includes a radio resource control RRC message. Optionally, the RRC message includes a primary system information block MIB message, or a system information block SIB message. Optionally, the physical layer signaling includes data control indication information DCI. Optionally, the third configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS, and/or third RE indication information,
所述第三RE指示信息包括:所述第一RS占用的RE位置,或者,The third RE indication information includes: an RE location occupied by the first RS, or
所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号与所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波与所述第一RS占用的RE对应的导频图案的类型指示标识三项中至少一项。The symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS is at least one of three types of the pilot pattern of the pilot pattern in which the RE of the first RS is located and the type of the pilot pattern corresponding to the RE occupied by the first RS.
可选的,所述用户设备的服务小区为CELL1,所述第三配置信息为所述NE1发送的,所述处理模块32可以具体用于根据所述第三配置信息确定接收数据时可用的时频资源。Optionally, the serving cell of the user equipment is CELL1, and the third configuration information is sent by the NE1, and the processing module 32 may be specifically configured to determine, when the data is received, according to the third configuration information. Frequency resources.
可选的,所述第三配置信息包括所述第三RE指示信息,且所述第三RE指示的所述第一RS占用的RE与所述用户设备的物理下行共享信道PDSCH的RE重叠,Optionally, the third configuration information includes the third RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE overlaps with the RE of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH of the user equipment,
则所述收发模块31具体用于通过所述NE1发送的UE专用信息接收第三配置信息;所述处理模块32确定的所述接收数据时可用的时频资源为,所述用户设备的PDSCH中与所述第一RS占用的RE不重叠的RE。The transceiver module 31 is configured to receive the third configuration information by using the UE-specific information sent by the NE1, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the processing module 32 determines the received data is the PDSCH of the user equipment. An RE that does not overlap with the RE occupied by the first RS.
可选的,所述用户设备服务小区为CELL2,所述第三配置信息为所述NE2发送的,所述处理模块32可以具体用于根据所述第三配置信息确定发送数据时可用的时频资源。Optionally, the user equipment serving cell is CELL2, and the third configuration information is sent by the NE2, and the processing module 32 may be specifically configured to determine, according to the third configuration information, a time frequency that is available when sending data. Resources.
可选的,所述第三配置信息包括第三RE指示信息,且所述第三RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE与所述用户设备的物理上行共享信道PUSCH的RE重叠;Optionally, the third configuration information includes a third RE indication information, and the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the third RE indication information overlaps with the RE of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH of the user equipment;
则所述收发模块31具体用于通过所述NE2发送的UE专用信息接收所述第三配置信息;所述处理模块32确定的所述发送数据时可用的时频资源为,所述用户设备的PUSCH中与所述第一RS占用的RE不重叠的RE。The transceiver module 31 is configured to receive the third configuration information by using the UE-specific information sent by the NE2, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the processing module 32 determines the data to be sent is An RE in the PUSCH that does not overlap with the RE occupied by the first RS.
图20为本发明实施例提供的一种网络设备的可选的结构示意图。 FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of an optional network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
如图20所示,本发明实施例提供了一种网络设备,该网络设备具有实现上述方法实际中第一网络设备行为的功能。网络设备的结构中包括无线通信接口111,例如可以是发射器和接收器,以及网络通信接口113。所述无线通信接口用于支持网络设备与网络设备和用户设备之间的通信,所述发射器用于向网络设备和用户设备发送上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据,所述接收器用于支持网络设备接收上述方法中所涉及的网络设备和用户设备发送的信息或者数据,所述网络通信接口用于支持网络设备与网络设备之间的通信。在一个可能的实现方式中,网络设备的结构中还可以包括解调器和/或译码器。所述解调器用于对上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据进行解调或者解扩频和解调;所述译码器用于对上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据进行译码或者进行解扰和译码。在一个可能的实现方式中,网络设备的结构中还可以包括处理器112。所述处理器被配置为支持网络设备执行上述方法中相应的功能。可以理解的是,当所述网络设备的结构中不包括所述解调器和/或译码器时,所述解调器和/或译码器的功能也可以在所述接收器或者所述处理器中完成。所述网络设备还可以包括存储器114,所述存储器用于与处理器耦合,保存网络设备必要的程序指令和数据。所述网络设备还可以包括接口单元,用于支持与其他网络设备之间的通信,如与核心网节点之间的通信。As shown in FIG. 20, an embodiment of the present invention provides a network device, where the network device has a function of implementing behavior of a first network device in the foregoing method. The structure of the network device includes a wireless communication interface 111, which may be, for example, a transmitter and a receiver, and a network communication interface 113. The wireless communication interface is configured to support communication between the network device and the network device and the user equipment, and the transmitter is configured to send information or data involved in the foregoing method to the network device and the user equipment, where the receiver is used to support the network. The device receives information or data sent by the network device and the user equipment involved in the foregoing method, and the network communication interface is used to support communication between the network device and the network device. In a possible implementation, a demodulator and/or a decoder may also be included in the structure of the network device. The demodulator is configured to demodulate or despread and demodulate information or data involved in the above method; the decoder is configured to decode or descramble information or data involved in the above method And decoding. In one possible implementation, the processor 112 may also be included in the structure of the network device. The processor is configured to support a network device to perform a corresponding function of the above methods. It can be understood that when the demodulator and/or decoder are not included in the structure of the network device, the functions of the demodulator and/or decoder may also be at the receiver or the Completed in the processor. The network device can also include a memory 114 for coupling with the processor to hold program instructions and data necessary for the network device. The network device may also include an interface unit for supporting communication with other network devices, such as communication with a core network node.
无线通信接口可以用于向网络设备发送或者接收其他网络设备发送的第一参考信号,也可以用于向用户设备发送第三配置信息或者第四配置信息。The wireless communication interface may be used to send or receive the first reference signal sent by the other network device to the network device, or may be used to send the third configuration information or the fourth configuration information to the user equipment.
可以理解的是,图20仅仅示出了所述网络设备的简化设计。在实际应用中,所述网络设备可以包含任意数量的发射器,接收器,处理器,存储器等,而所有可以实现本发明实施例的网络设备都在本发明实施例的保护范围之内。It will be appreciated that Figure 20 only shows a simplified design of the network device. In a practical application, the network device may include any number of transmitters, receivers, processors, memories, etc., and all the network devices that can implement the embodiments of the present invention are within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present invention.
图21为本发明实施例提供的又一种网络设备的可选的结构示意图。FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of another network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
如图21所示,本发明实施例提供了一种网络设备,该网络设备具有实现上述方法实际中第二网络设备行为的功能。网络设备的结构中包括无线通信接口121,例如可以是发射器和接收器,以及网络通信接口123。所述无线通信接口用于支持网络设备与网络设备和用户设备之间的通信,所述发射器用于向网络设备和用户设备发送上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据,所述接收器用于支持网络设备接收上述方法中所涉及的网络设备和用户设备发送的信息或者数据,所述网络通信接口用于支持网络设备与网络设备之间的通信。在一个可能的实现方式中,网络设备的结构中还可以包括解调器和/或译码器。所述解调器用于对上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据进行解调或者解扩频和解调;所述译码器用于对上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据进行译码或者进行解扰和译码。在一个可能的实现方式中,网络设备的结构中还可以包括处理器122。所述处理器被配置为支持网络设备执行上述方法中相应的功能。可以理解的是,当所述网络设备的结构中不包括所述解调器和/或译码器时,所述解调器和/或译码器的功能也可以在所述接收器或者所述处理器中完成。所述网络设备还可以包括存储器124,所述存储器用于与处理器耦合,保存网络设备必要的程序指令和数据。所述网络设备还可以包括接口单元,用于支持与其他网络设备之间的通信,如与核心网节点之间的通信。As shown in FIG. 21, an embodiment of the present invention provides a network device, where the network device has a function of implementing behavior of a second network device in the foregoing method. The structure of the network device includes a wireless communication interface 121, which may be, for example, a transmitter and a receiver, and a network communication interface 123. The wireless communication interface is configured to support communication between the network device and the network device and the user equipment, and the transmitter is configured to send information or data involved in the foregoing method to the network device and the user equipment, where the receiver is used to support the network. The device receives information or data sent by the network device and the user equipment involved in the foregoing method, and the network communication interface is used to support communication between the network device and the network device. In a possible implementation, a demodulator and/or a decoder may also be included in the structure of the network device. The demodulator is configured to demodulate or despread and demodulate information or data involved in the above method; the decoder is configured to decode or descramble information or data involved in the above method And decoding. In a possible implementation, the processor 122 may also be included in the structure of the network device. The processor is configured to support a network device to perform a corresponding function of the above methods. It can be understood that when the demodulator and/or decoder are not included in the structure of the network device, the functions of the demodulator and/or decoder may also be at the receiver or the Completed in the processor. The network device can also include a memory 124 for coupling with the processor to store program instructions and data necessary for the network device. The network device may also include an interface unit for supporting communication with other network devices, such as communication with a core network node.
无线通信接口可以用于向网络设备发送或者接收其他网络设备发送的第一参考信号,也可以用于向用户设备发送第三配置信息或者第四配置信息。The wireless communication interface may be used to send or receive the first reference signal sent by the other network device to the network device, or may be used to send the third configuration information or the fourth configuration information to the user equipment.
可以理解的是,图21仅仅示出了所述网络设备的简化设计。在实际应用中,所述网 络设备可以包含任意数量的发射器,接收器,处理器,存储器等,而所有可以实现本发明实施例的网络设备都在本发明实施例的保护范围之内。It will be appreciated that Figure 21 only shows a simplified design of the network device. In practical applications, the network The network device may include any number of transmitters, receivers, processors, memories, etc., and all network devices that can implement the embodiments of the present invention are within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present invention.
图22为本发明实施例提供的一种用户设备的可选的结构示意图。FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of an optional user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
如图22所示,本发明实施例提供了一种用户设备,用户设备的结构中包括收发器131,例如可以是接收器和发射器。所述发射器用于支持用户设备向网络设备发送上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据,所述接收器用于支持用户设备接收上述方法中所涉及的网络设备发送的信息或者数据。在一个可能的实现方式中,用户设备的结构中还可以包括编码器和/或调制器。所述编码器用于对上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据进行编码或者进行编码和加扰;所述调制器用于对上述方法中所涉及的信息或者数据进行调制或者进行调制和扩频。在一个可能的实现方式中,用户设备还可以包括处理器132。所述处理器被配置为支持用户设备执行上述方法中相应的功能。可以理解的是,当所述用户设备的结构中不包括所述调制器和/或编码器时,所述调制器和/或编码器的功能也可以在所述发射器或者所述处理器中完成。所述用户设备还可以包括存储器134,所述存储器用于与处理器耦合,保存用户设备必要的程序指令和数据。As shown in FIG. 22, an embodiment of the present invention provides a user equipment. The structure of the user equipment includes a transceiver 131, which may be, for example, a receiver and a transmitter. The transmitter is configured to support the user equipment to send information or data involved in the foregoing method to the network device, and the receiver is configured to support the user equipment to receive information or data sent by the network device involved in the foregoing method. In a possible implementation, an encoder and/or a modulator may also be included in the structure of the user equipment. The encoder is used to encode or encode and scramble the information or data involved in the above method; the modulator is used to modulate or modulate and spread the information or data involved in the above method. In a possible implementation, the user equipment may further include a processor 132. The processor is configured to support a user device to perform a corresponding function in the above method. It can be understood that when the modulator and/or the encoder are not included in the structure of the user equipment, the functions of the modulator and/or the encoder may also be in the transmitter or the processor. carry out. The user equipment may also include a memory 134 for coupling with the processor to store program instructions and data necessary for the user equipment.
无线通信接口可以用于接收网络设备发送第三配置信息或者第四配置信息。The wireless communication interface may be configured to receive, by the network device, third configuration information or fourth configuration information.
可以理解的是,图22仅仅示出了所述用户设备的简化设计。在实际应用中,所述用户设备可以包含任意数量的发射器,接收器,处理器,存储器等,而所有可以实现本发明实施例的网络设备都在本发明实施例的保护范围之内。It will be appreciated that Figure 22 only shows a simplified design of the user equipment. In a practical application, the user equipment may include any number of transmitters, receivers, processors, memories, etc., and all network devices that can implement the embodiments of the present invention are within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present invention.
本发明实施例提供了一种通信系统,该系统包括上述方面所述的网络设备和用户设备。The embodiment of the invention provides a communication system, which comprises the network device and the user equipment described in the above aspects.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本发明实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present invention are generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transfer to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD)).
本领域内的技术人员应明白,本发明实施例的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此,本发明实施例可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且,本发明实施例可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、CD-ROM、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that embodiments of the embodiments of the invention may be provided as a method, system, or computer program product. Thus, embodiments of the invention may be in the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or a combination of software and hardware. Moreover, embodiments of the invention may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) including computer usable program code.
本发明实施例是参照根据本发明实施例实施例的方法、装置(系统)、和计算机 程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。Embodiments of the present invention refer to a method, a device (system), and a computer according to an embodiment of the present invention. The flow chart and/or block diagram of the program product is described. It will be understood that each flow and/or block of the flowchart illustrations and/or FIG. These computer program instructions can be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor, or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine for the execution of instructions for execution by a processor of a computer or other programmable data processing device. Means for implementing the functions specified in one or more of the flow or in a block or blocks of the flow chart.
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中,使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。The computer program instructions can also be stored in a computer readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer readable memory produce an article of manufacture comprising the instruction device. The apparatus implements the functions specified in one or more blocks of a flow or a flow and/or block diagram of the flowchart.
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These computer program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device such that a series of operational steps are performed on a computer or other programmable device to produce computer-implemented processing for execution on a computer or other programmable device. The instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more of the flow or in a block or blocks of a flow diagram.
尽管已描述了本发明实施例的优选实施例,但本领域内的技术人员一旦得知了基本创造性概念,则可对这些实施例作出另外的变更和修改。所以,所附权利要求书意欲解释为包括优选实施例以及落入本发明实施例范围的所有变更和修改。While the preferred embodiment of the present invention has been described, it will be apparent that those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the embodiments. Therefore, the appended claims are intended to be construed as a
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本发明实施例进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本发明实施例的精神和范围。这样,倘若本发明实施例的这些修改和变型属于本发明实施例及其等同技术的范围之内,则本发明实施例也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。 It is apparent that those skilled in the art can make various modifications and variations to the embodiments of the invention without departing from the spirit and scope of the embodiments of the invention. Thus, it is intended that the present invention cover the modifications and variations of the embodiments of the present invention.

Claims (24)

  1. 一种参考信号的传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for transmitting a reference signal, comprising:
    第一小区CELL1所属的第一网络设备NE1根据第一配置信息向第二小区CELL2所属的第二网络设备NE2发送第一参考信号RS;所述第一配置信息包括用于指示所述NE1发送所述第一RS时使用的时频资源的信息。The first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs sends the first reference signal RS to the second network device NE2 to which the second cell CELL2 belongs according to the first configuration information; the first configuration information includes The information of the time-frequency resource used in the first RS is described.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的传输方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括:The transmission method according to claim 1, wherein the first configuration information comprises:
    所述第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,Subframe information of the first RS, and/or,
    第一资源单元RE指示信息,所述第一RE指示信息用于指示所述第一RS占用的RE。The first resource unit RE indicates information, and the first RE indication information is used to indicate an RE occupied by the first RS.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的传输方法,其特征在于,所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧属于所述NE2的探测参考信号SRS可选的子帧的集合。The transmission method according to claim 2, wherein the subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS belongs to a set of selectable subframes of the sounding reference signal SRS of the NE2.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的传输方法,其特征在于,The transmission method according to claim 3, characterized in that
    第一RE指示信息指示的第一RS占用的RE与所述NE2下的SRS使用的RE不同;和/或;第一RE指示信息指示的第一RS占用的RE与所述NE2下的SRS使用的RE所在的子载波不同;和/或;第一RE指示信息指示的第一RS占用的RE与所述NE2下的SRS使用的RE所在的符号不同。The RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information is different from the RE used by the SRS under the NE2; and/or; the RE occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information and the SRS used by the NE2 The subcarriers in which the REs are located are different; and/or; the REs occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information are different from the symbols of the REs used by the SRSs under the NE2.
  5. 根据权利要求2所述的传输方法,其特征在于,所述第一RS的子帧信息为专用子帧,所述专用子帧承载所述第一RS。The transmission method according to claim 2, wherein the subframe information of the first RS is a dedicated subframe, and the dedicated subframe carries the first RS.
  6. 根据权利要求2或5所述的传输方法,其特征在于,A transmission method according to claim 2 or 5, characterized in that
    所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧中只包含所述第一RS,或者,The subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS includes only the first RS, or
    所述第一RS的子帧信息确定的子帧中包含所述第一RS和物理下行控制信道PDCCH信息,或者包含所述第一RS和小区参考信号CRS信息,或者包含所述第一RS和PDCCH信息和CRS信息。The subframe determined by the subframe information of the first RS includes the first RS and physical downlink control channel PDCCH information, or includes the first RS and cell reference signal CRS information, or includes the first RS and PDCCH information and CRS information.
  7. 根据权利要求1-6任一所述的传输方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The transmission method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述NE1根据所述第一配置信息,确定向由所述第一小区服务的第一用户设备UE1发送下行数据时可用的时频资源。The NE1 determines, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the downlink data is sent to the first user equipment UE1 served by the first cell.
  8. 根据权利要求1-7任一所述的传输方法,其特征在于,A transmission method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein
    所述NE1向UE1发送第三配置信息,所述第三配置信息用于指示所述UE1从所述NE1接收数据时可用的时频资源,所述UE1从所述NE1接收下行数据时可用的时频资源与所述第一配置信息指示的所述NE1发送所述第一RS使用的时频资源不重叠。The NE1 sends third configuration information to the UE1, where the third configuration information is used to indicate time-frequency resources available when the UE1 receives data from the NE1, and when the UE1 receives downlink data from the NE1. The frequency resource does not overlap with the time-frequency resource used by the NE1 that is sent by the first configuration information to send the first RS.
  9. 一种参考信号的传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for transmitting a reference signal, comprising:
    第二小区CELL2归属的第二网络设备NE2根据第一配置信息接收第一小区CELL1归属的第一网络设备NE1发送的第一参考信号RS,所述第一配置信息包括用于指示所述NE1发送所述第一RS所使用的时频资源的信息。The second network device NE2 to which the second cell CELL2 belongs receives the first reference signal RS sent by the first network device NE1 to which the first cell CELL1 belongs according to the first configuration information, where the first configuration information includes Information of a time-frequency resource used by the first RS.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的传输方法,其特征在于,The transmission method according to claim 9, wherein
    所述NE2根据所述第一RS消除所述NE1对第一上行数据的干扰,所述第一上行数据来自所述NE2下的用户设备。The NE2 cancels the interference of the NE1 on the first uplink data according to the first RS, where the first uplink data is from a user equipment under the NE2.
  11. 根据权利要求9或10所述的传输方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括:The transmission method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the first configuration information comprises:
    所述第一RS的子帧信息,和,The subframe information of the first RS, and,
    第一资源单元RE指示信息,所述第一RE指示信息用于指示所述第一RS占用的RE。 The first resource unit RE indicates information, and the first RE indication information is used to indicate an RE occupied by the first RS.
  12. 根据权利要求9-11任一所述的传输方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The transmission method according to any one of claims 9-11, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述NE2根据所述第一配置信息,确定分配给由所述CELL2服务的第二用户设备UE2发送上行数据时可用的时频资源。The NE2 determines, according to the first configuration information, a time-frequency resource that is available when the second user equipment UE2 served by the CELL2 sends uplink data.
  13. 根据权利要求9-12任一所述的传输方法,其特征在于,所述传输方法还包括:The transmission method according to any one of claims 9 to 12, wherein the transmission method further comprises:
    所述NE2向UE2发送第四配置信息,所述第四配置信息用于指示所述UE2向所述NE2发送上行数据时可用的时频资源,所述UE2向所述NE2发送上行数据时可用的时频资源与所述第一配置信息指示的所述NE1发送所述第一RS使用的时频资源不重叠。The NE2 sends the fourth configuration information to the UE2, where the fourth configuration information is used to indicate the time-frequency resource that is available when the UE2 sends the uplink data to the NE2, and is available when the UE2 sends the uplink data to the NE2. The time-frequency resource does not overlap with the time-frequency resource used by the NE1 that is sent by the first configuration information to send the first RS.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的传输方法,其特征在于,The transmission method according to claim 13, wherein
    所述第四配置信息包括所述第一配置信息中的第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第四RE指示信息;The fourth configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS in the first configuration information, and/or fourth RE indication information;
    其中,所述第四RE指示信息包括:所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE,或者,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号,或者,所述第一RE指示信息指示的所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波,或者,导频图案的类型指示标识中至少一项。The fourth RE indication information includes: an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information, or an RE that is occupied by the first RS indicated by the first RE indication information. The symbol, or the first RE indication information indicates at least one of a subcarrier in which the RE occupied by the first RS is located, or a type indication identifier of a pilot pattern.
  15. 一种参考信号的传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for transmitting a reference signal, comprising:
    确定接收数据或者发送数据时可用的时频资源,所述接收数据或者发送数据时可用的时频资源与第一RS使用的时频资源不重叠,所述第一RS为第一小区CELL1归属的第一网络设备NE1向第二小区CELL2归属的第二网络设备NE2发送的。The time-frequency resource that is available when the data is received or the data is sent, and the time-frequency resource that is available when the data is received or the data is not overlapped with the time-frequency resource used by the first RS, where the first RS belongs to the first cell CELL1. The first network device NE1 sends the second network device NE2 to which the second cell CELL2 belongs.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的传输方法,其特征在于,The transmission method according to claim 15, wherein
    所述UE1根据第三配置信息确定接收数据或者发送数据时可用的时频资源,所述第三配置信息用于指示第一参考信号RS占用的全部或者部分时频资源,,所述UE1的服务小区为CELL1或者CELL2。The UE1 determines, according to the third configuration information, time-frequency resources that are available when receiving data or transmitting data, where the third configuration information is used to indicate all or part of time-frequency resources occupied by the first reference signal RS, and the service of the UE1 The cell is CELL1 or CELL2.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的传输方法,其特征在于,在所述UE1根据第三配置信息确定接收数据或者发送数据时可用的时频资源之前,包括:The transmission method according to claim 16, wherein before the determining, by the UE1, the time-frequency resources available when receiving data or transmitting data according to the third configuration information, the method includes:
    所述UE1从所述NE1或者所述NE2接收所述第三配置信息。The UE1 receives the third configuration information from the NE1 or the NE2.
  18. 根据权利要求16-17任一所述的传输方法,其特征在于,所述第三配置信息包括所述第一RS的子帧信息,和/或,第三RE指示信息,The transmission method according to any one of claims 16-17, wherein the third configuration information includes subframe information of the first RS, and/or third RE indication information,
    所述第三RE指示信息包括:所述第一RS占用的RE位置,或者,The third RE indication information includes: an RE location occupied by the first RS, or
    所述第一RS占用的RE所在的符号与所述第一RS占用的RE所在的子载波与所述第一RS占用的RE对应的导频图案的类型指示标识三项中至少一项。The symbol of the RE occupied by the first RS is at least one of three types of the pilot pattern of the pilot pattern in which the RE of the first RS is located and the type of the pilot pattern corresponding to the RE occupied by the first RS.
  19. 一种参考信号的传输装置,其特征在于,包括:第一收发模块、第二收发模块、处理模块,用于执行如权利要求1-14任一所述的参考信号的传输方法。A transmission device for a reference signal, comprising: a first transceiver module, a second transceiver module, and a processing module, configured to perform the method for transmitting a reference signal according to any one of claims 1-14.
  20. 一种参考信号的传输装置,其特征在于,包括:收发模块和处理模块,用于执行如权利要求1-18任一所述的参考信号的传输方法。A transmission device for a reference signal, comprising: a transceiver module and a processing module, configured to perform the method for transmitting a reference signal according to any one of claims 1-18.
  21. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:无线通信接口、网络通信接口、处理器,用于执行如权利要求9-14任一所述的参考信号的传输方法。A network device, comprising: a wireless communication interface, a network communication interface, a processor, and a method for transmitting a reference signal according to any one of claims 9-14.
  22. 一种用户设备,其特征在于,包括:无线通信接口和处理器,用于执行如权利要求15-18任一所述的参考信号的传输方法。A user equipment, comprising: a wireless communication interface and a processor, for performing the method for transmitting a reference signal according to any one of claims 15-18.
  23. 一种可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括指令,当所述指令被运行时,如权利要求 1-18任一所述的参考信号的传输方法被实现。A readable storage medium, comprising instructions, when the instructions are executed, as claimed The transmission method of the reference signal described in any of 1 to 18 is implemented.
  24. 一种装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和存储器,存储器用于存储指令,所述指令被所述处理器运行时,如权利要求1-18任一所述的参考信号的传输方法被实现。 An apparatus comprising a processor and a memory for storing instructions, the instructions being transmitted by the processor, the method of transmitting a reference signal according to any of claims 1-18.
PCT/CN2017/085682 2016-05-24 2017-05-24 Method and device for transmitting reference signal, network apparatus and user equipment unit WO2017202333A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP17802179.6A EP3457612B1 (en) 2016-05-24 2017-05-24 Method and device for transmitting reference signal, network apparatus and user equipment unit
US16/198,244 US20190098615A1 (en) 2016-05-24 2018-11-21 Reference signal transmission method and apparatus, network device, and user equipment

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201610352243.0 2016-05-24
CN201610352243 2016-05-24
CN201710008515.X 2017-01-05
CN201710008515.XA CN107425948B (en) 2016-05-24 2017-01-05 Reference signal transmission method and device, network equipment and user equipment

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/198,244 Continuation US20190098615A1 (en) 2016-05-24 2018-11-21 Reference signal transmission method and apparatus, network device, and user equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017202333A1 true WO2017202333A1 (en) 2017-11-30

Family

ID=60412039

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2017/085682 WO2017202333A1 (en) 2016-05-24 2017-05-24 Method and device for transmitting reference signal, network apparatus and user equipment unit

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2017202333A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11329781B2 (en) * 2019-02-12 2022-05-10 Qualcomm Incorporated Sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission in multiple SRS symbols in a subframe

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102823167A (en) * 2010-03-24 2012-12-12 Lg电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for reducing inter-cell interference in radio communication system
CN103875219A (en) * 2013-12-13 2014-06-18 华为技术有限公司 Interference coordination method, device, and system
WO2015069026A1 (en) * 2013-11-05 2015-05-14 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for wireless communication with dual connectivity

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102823167A (en) * 2010-03-24 2012-12-12 Lg电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for reducing inter-cell interference in radio communication system
WO2015069026A1 (en) * 2013-11-05 2015-05-14 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for wireless communication with dual connectivity
CN103875219A (en) * 2013-12-13 2014-06-18 华为技术有限公司 Interference coordination method, device, and system

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11329781B2 (en) * 2019-02-12 2022-05-10 Qualcomm Incorporated Sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission in multiple SRS symbols in a subframe

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20230247641A1 (en) Design of coreset configurations
JP7225092B2 (en) Sequence generation for systems supporting mixed numerology
TWI758466B (en) Relaying in a device-to-device communication system
JP6576384B2 (en) Reference signal receiving method and user equipment, reference signal transmitting method and base station
EP3410772B1 (en) Base station, terminal, and communication method
CA3005846C (en) Narrow band prach with multiple tone hopping distances
KR101710204B1 (en) Method and apparatus of transmitting reference signal for channel measurement in multiple input multiple output communication system
KR102040616B1 (en) Method of allocating a resource in a wireless communication system and device for same
JP7233412B2 (en) Method and Apparatus for Demodulation Reference Signal Design and Associated Signaling
CN107425948B (en) Reference signal transmission method and device, network equipment and user equipment
US9781760B2 (en) User terminal and processor for performing D2D transmission
CN108353401B (en) LTE-D communication for V2X applications
CA3050548A1 (en) Narrowband time-division duplex frame structure for narrowband communications
US20130242880A1 (en) Aggregation For A New Carrier Type
JP2019531631A (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting D2D data of terminal in wireless communication system
TW201728119A (en) Uplink grants for narrowband internet-of-things
EP3331310B1 (en) User equipment, base station, and method for transmitting and receiving data channel
EP3410771A2 (en) Base station, terminal and communication method
KR20140097160A (en) Method for mitigating inter-cell interference in wireless communication system and device therefor
KR101823339B1 (en) Mitigation of control channel interference
TW201728142A (en) Narrow band ACK / NACK transmissions
CN104137435A (en) Method for reducing inter-cell interference in cooperative multi-cell wireless communication system, and apparatus for same
CN104081698B (en) Method for transceiving downlink control channel in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
CN104782068A (en) Reception and configuration of downlink control channel
JP2016536866A (en) Method and apparatus for managing uplink transmission resources in a wireless communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17802179

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2017802179

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20181212